You are on page 1of 256

MSC.

Software Corporation Legal Information

Europe Corporate Asia Pacific MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this
MSC.Software GmbH MSC.Software Corporation MSC.Software Japan Ltd. document without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and
Am Moosfeld 13 2 MacArthur Place Shinjuku First West 8F
81829 Munich, Germany Santa Ana, CA 92707 USA 23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
educational purposes only, and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0 Telephone: (800) 345-2078 1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku design. MSC.Software Corporation assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6 Fax: (714) 784-4056 Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein.
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201 Copyright © 2008 MSC.Software Corporation. All Rights Reserved. This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of
this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the
prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is prohibited.
The MSC.Software corporate logo, Adams, Dytran, Easy5, Fatigue, Laminate Modeler, Marc, Mentat, MD Nastran, MD
Patran, MSC, MSC Nastran, Mvision, Patran, SimDesigner, SimEnterprise, SimManager, SimXpert and Sofy are
Durability and Fatigue Life trademarks or registered trademarks of the MSC.Software Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. All other trademarks belong to their respective owners.
Analysis Using MSC Fatigue
PAT318 Course Notes

Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation

Part Number: P3*V2008R1*Z*Z*Z*SM-PAT318-NT September 2008 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation 2

CONTENTS CONTENTS (cont.)


1 Overview of Durability and Fatigue Life Analysis 13 Loads and Boundary Conditions
2 Overview of MSC Fatigue 14 Results
3 MSC Fatigue User Interface 15 Patran Files
4 Overview of Patran 16 Stress-Life (S-N) Theory
5 Geometry Modeling 17 Strain-Life (E-N) Theory
6 Finite Element Meshing 18 Fatigue Crack Propagation
7 Viewing and Display 19 Multiaxial Fatigue
8 Groups and Lists 20 Fatigue of Welded Structures
9 Materials 21 Software Strain Gauge
10 Element Properties 22 Vibration Fatigue Analysis
11 Analysis Setup 23 MSC Fatigue Utilities
12 Fields 24 Miscellaneous Features

Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation

3 4
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation

5
COURSE OBJECTIVES
● Solve durability problems using MSC Fatigue.
● Students will work through a number of workshop problems in
class with assistance from the instructor
SECTION 1 ● Simple workshop problems designed to introduce basic concepts
OVERVIEW OF DURABILITY AND ● Apply the basic concepts of fatigue analysis: total life (S-N), crack

FATIGUE LIFE ANALYSIS initiation (E-N), crack propagation (LEFM), and vibration fatigue.
● Learn the theoretical background of fatigue and durability analysis
● Apply knowledge of fatigue and durability analysis to improve
product life by avoiding premature fatigue failures.
● Integrate fatigue analysis with testing.

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-2

COMPANY OVERVIEW MSC U.S. TECHNICAL SUPPORT

● The MSC Software Corporation has been supplying ● With corporate headquarters in Santa Ana, California,
sophisticated computer-aided engineering (CAE) tools MSC Software maintains regional sales and support
since 1963 offices throughout the US:
● MSC Software is the developer, distributor, and ● The MSC Software technical support hotline (1-800-732-7284) is
supporter of the most complete and widely-used staffed Monday through Friday 7:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m. PST
structural analysis program in the world, MD Nastran
● Fax number is (714) 784-4056
● MSC Software is also the developer, distributor, and
supporter of the state of the art CAE analysis program,
Patran
● Patran is an open architecture pre- and post-processor
for all major finite element analysis (FEA) software,
including MD Nastran, Marc, Dytran, and others…
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-4
MSC WORLDWIDE TECHNICAL SUPPORT

● MSC.Software also maintains offices worldwide


● If appropriate, your course instructor will provide information for
accessing and contacting MSC support in your area
● Sign up to the MSC Forums and become a member of our talented
community at: OVERVIEW OF DURABILITY AND
http://forums.mscsoftware.com/
FATIGUE LIFE ANALYSIS
● Methods for contacting the MSC global support team:
● Email support for Patran is via: mscpatran.support@mscsoftware.com
● Email support for Fatigue is via: mscfatigue.support@mscsoftware.com
● Website support at: http://www.mscsoftware.com/support
● This information is also available in the Nastran and Patran release
guides

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-6

WHAT IS DURABILITY? DEFINITION OF FATIGUE


According to BS 7608:
● Durability is… “fatigue is the damage of a structural part by the
initiation and gradual propagation of a crack or cracks
“the ability to do what its supposed to for as long as its caused by repeated applications of stress”
supposed to do it!”

● From a practical point of view, fatigue is:


● Reliability is… ● a process where repeated variations in loading cause failure
even when the nominal stresses are below the material yield
“having half a chance of doing what its supposed to for strength; and is
as long as its supposed to do it!” ● made up of crack initiation and subsequent crack growth as a
result of cyclic, plastic deformation.

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-8
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF FATIGUE THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF FATIGUE (CONT.)
● Fatigue failures typically start at the surface of a
specimen or component There are many ways of starting a small crack:

● Fatigue failures start at small microscopic cracks and ● cracking or debonding of second phase particles;
accordingly are very sensitive to even minute stress ● natural scratches and machining marks on the surface;
raisers
● corrosion pits or intergranular attack;
● porosity from casting;
● The process of fatigue encompasses the entire range
● laps from forging and forming;
from the formation of a microcrack in a persistent slip
band to the propagation of a long crack in an elastic- ● brittle surface layers
plastic continuum.

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-10

CRACK INITIATION & GROWTH: STAGE I AND II


CRACK INITIATION & GROWTH: STAGE I AND II
(CONT.)

~1mm

Persistent Slip Stage I Stage II


Band Formation Crack Growth Crack Growth
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-12
THE EARLY DAYS OF FATIGUE
Over design 42
Under design 7

A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE

Product life used to be a hit and miss affair


PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-14

A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE (CONT.)


1850+ WÖHLER conducts first systematic fatigue
1828 ALBERT tests mine hoist
investigations on axles:
chains under cyclic loading
● Develops the ROTATING-BENDING fatigue test
1839 PONCELET designs mill ● Concept of FATIGUE LIMIT
wheels with cast iron axles. ● Development of fatigue design strategies
● Identifies importance of cyclic & mean stresses
First uses the term ‘fatigue’
● Recognizes the effect of notches
in a book on mechanics ● S-N Curves appear some thirty years later
1849 IMechE debate the
"CRYSTALLIZATION"
theory

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-16
A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE (CONT.) A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE (CONT.)
Wohler’s Railway Component Test Rig Some of Wohler’s data for rotating bending tests

Stress Amplitude

Unnotched Shaft

Notched Shaft
Wöhler measured the compression of
railway bogie suspensions to determine
maximum service loads on axles.
In-service loading was simulated by Log (Fatigue life)
rotating-bending tests
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-18

A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE (CONT.) A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE (CONT.)


1864 FAIRBAIRN experiments with repeated loads 1955 MANSON & COFFIN investigate fatigue under
STRAIN conditions, thermal cycling and low cycle &
1886 BAUSCHINGER first documents stress-strain plastic strain considerations
HYSTERESIS
1959 PARIS & ERDOGAN present first systematic method
1903 EWING & HUMPHREY disprove the Crystallization for handling crack propagation using FRACTURE
theory and show that fatigue occurs due to SLIP MECHANICS
1910 BAIRSTOW investigates stress-strain response 1961 FORSYTH identifies stage I and II crack propagation
during cycling - develops concepts of cyclic
1961 NEUBER proposes a method for estimating elastic-
HARDENING and SOFTENING plastic stresses and strains at stress concentrations
1920 GRIFFITH investigates cracks in glass - the birth of 1968 MATSUISHI & ENDO present the rainflow method for
FRACTURE MECHANICS cycle counting
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-20
A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE (CONT.) A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE (CONT.)
1968 TOMKINS - high strain crack propagation law -
physical basis for Coffin-Manson
Battelle Study 1982
1976 KITAGAWA & TAKAHASHI - rationalised the fatigue
● “...Between 80 - 90% of all
limit and the fatigue threshold
structural failures occur through
a fatigue mechanism…”
Failure
Log (Stress range)

Fatigue limit
● “...The estimated annual cost of
fracture and fatigue to the US
Safe was 4.4% of GDP…and could
be reduced by 29% by
application of current
Log (Crack size) technology…”
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-22

A SHORT HISTORY OF FATIGUE (CONT.)


FATIGUE FAILURE & EDUCATION
1982 nCode (UK) established to market fatigue life
estimation software & consultancy services
1986 BROWN devises a fatigue map to identify the "Despite 150 years of fatigue research, unintended
dominant mechanisms fatigue failures still occur.

1990 P/FATIGUE launched by PDA Engineering More research will NOT reduce the incidence of fatigue
(now MSC Fatigue) failure - more education will!"
2003 MSC & nCode partnership to co-develop fatigue Prof. D. Socie
analysis software University of IIIinois,1990

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-24
USE OF FATIGUE TECHNOLOGY

● Fatigue analysis is not new (60-170 years old);

● A collection of empirical rules to fit observed behaviour;

USE OF FATIGUE ● Does not require the engineer exploiting it to understand


TECHNOLOGY all the finer points;

● Can be used (with training and experience) to achieve


Integrated Durability Management (IDM) goals.

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-26

FATIGUE CALCULATIONS IN… WHO USES FATIGUE ANALYSIS?


● Design engineer:
● Concept design phase: Design optimization for durability on the “virtual component”
Analytical loads, previous design loads, estimated properties,
early design optimization ● Development engineer
Measures data on the “real component”, tells the design analyst
● Verification phase: where it’s wrong and how to fix it.
Measured loads, real properties, design refinement and
optimization ● Test rig engineer
Pre-predicts rig tests and edits out non damaging cycles to speed
them up.
● Production phase:
Continued development, new markets, firefighting ● Production engineer
Investigates service failures, monitors production, feeds back
improvement ideas.
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-28
DESIGNING AGAINST FATIGUE FAILURE DESIGNING AGAINST FATIGUE FAILURE (CONT.)

Requirements: Constraints:
● Life calculations are much less precise than strength calculations
● Higher Performance ● Fatigue properties can not be inferred from static mechanical
properties
● Lower Weight ● Laboratory tests often exhibit scatter and are difficult to translate to
full size components
● Longer Life
● Full scale prototype testing is often required to confirm an
● Reasonable Cost acceptable life
● Designs should be ‘defect tolerant’ - stressing and materials
● As Soon As Possible selection to ensure slow crack growth and detectability before
failure
● Designs should be ‘Fail Safe’, where possible

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-30

DESIGN APPROACHES
● SAFE LIFE
Evaluate expected life, use a margin of safety, design to
survive expected service life, and then retire.

● FAIL SAFE WHAT DRIVES DURABILITY


Provides redundant load paths, design to fail into a safe
condition and survive until repair.
MANAGEMENT?

● DEFECT TOLERANCE
Assumes flaws do exist, design to live with some crack
growth below critical size, requires regular inspections.

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-32
GOALS, DRIVERS & REALITIES PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LIFE CYCLE
● Competition requires FASTER concept-to-customer.

Production
● Costs/profits require CHEAPER products, materials and
manufacturing processes. Production Pilot

Engineering
● Functionality requires BETTER products with high-tech features and Prototype
Engineering Prototype
performance. DESIGN
Mechanical
Prototype FIX TEST
VPD (CAE) for Durability
● Legislation requires products with LONGER life, more reliable
Mechanical
durability and inspection periods. Concept Prototype
Concept
● The customer requires the last mile/flight/hour to be the same as the Development Time
Traditional Design Development
first. VPD Design Objectives

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-34

TRADITIONAL APPROACH: BUILD–TEST–FIX INCLUDE CAE: ANALYSE & OPTIMISE FIRST


Generate
Generate idea
idea
Analyse Previous
Optimize experience
Build it
Fix it NO
OK?
YES
Test it Build it
NO
NO Out of
OK? Correlate test
Test it Measure
time?
YES
& analysis
YES
Begin NO YES Begin
Production OK?
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-35
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-36
Production
PREDICTING PRODUCT LIFE: BUILD & USE PREDICTING PRODUCT LIFE: ADD SIGN-OFF TESTING

Customer Product Customer Accelerated Product


Usage Life Usage Sign-off Test Life

Check Life Based on


Build it and Use It Customer Usage
Re-Design

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-38

PREDICTING PRODUCT LIFE: ADD SIMULATED PREDICTING PRODUCT LIFE: ADD CAE
TESTING
Simulated
Customer Accelerated Product
Component
Usage Sign-off Test Life
Test
Customer Simulated
Accelerated Product
Usage Component
Sign-off Test Life
Test Measured Correlation
Service
Loading
CAE
Measured Stress Product
Fatigue
Service Analysis Life
Simulation
Loading
Material
Re-Design Properties
Re-Design
Optimize
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-40
FATIGUE LIFE METHODS

● S-N (Stress-Life Method)


Relates nominal or local elastic stress to total life

● E-N (Strain-Life Method)


OVERVIEW OF FATIGUE LIFE Relates local strain to crack initiation life
CALCULATION METHODS
● LEFM (Crack Propagation Method)
Relates stress intensity to crack propagation rate

All methods rely on SIMILITUDE


PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-42

S-N METHOD S-N METHOD - SIMILITUDE

Stress Amplitude
● Also known as Stress-Life and Total Life Method Unnot ched Shaft

● Estimates the total fatigue life to catastrophic failure Notched Shaft

Life in Cycles

● Fatigue life computed from log stress vs log cycles


(S-N) curve.
σ nom
● Method is appropriate for long life fatigue problems where
there is little plasticity since the method is based on
nominal elastic stress

● Fatigue life estimates are associated with a probability of σ nom


failure due to the large amount of scatter in the S-N The life of this . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is the same as the life of this . . . . .
curve. if both are subject to the same nominal stress
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-44
E-N METHOD E-N METHOD - SIMILITUDE
● Is also called the local strain approach, crack initiation
method, and strain-life approach

● E-N method is one of the most common life prediction


methods used in the automotive industry  
● Practically, crack initiation means that a crack of around
1-2 mm has developed. This is often a high proportion of
the component life.

● Many automotive components are designed to survive


some significant plastic strains in use (especially on the
test track!). The E-N method will handle these better than The crack initiation life here . . . . . is the same as it is here . . . . .
the S-N method which basically ignores plasticity. if both experience the same local strains
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-46

STRAIN-LIFE (E-N) CURVE S-N AND E-N FATIGUE CURVES COMPARED


● Also known as “Low Cycle Fatigue” or “Local Strain Approach”
● Local strains can be elastic or plastic hence its suitability for E-N Curve
Low Cycle High Cycle
low cycle fatigue. Region Region 'Infinite Life'
(EN Method) (SN or EN Method)
S-N Curve

Plastic (Low Cycle


ε/σ
S-N & E-N curves
ε Fatigue Line)
coincide in high cycle
region because nominal
stresses will be linear
Elastic (High Cycle elastic
Fatigue Line)
E-N can also be used in
low cycle region. S-N
cannot, because linear
N 1000 Cycles 10 7 Cycles N stress-strain relationship
is invalid
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-47 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-48
CRACK PROPAGATION (LEFM) METHOD CRACK PROPAGATION METHOD - SIMILITUDE
● What remnant life is there after initiation?

● What is the safe life or inspection schedule for a


component that is or may be cracked?

● The crack growth method is based on the principles of


Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM)

● It relates stress intensity factors to crack growth rates

● It uses cycle-by-cycle calculations to predict lifetimes

● It is frequently used in Aerospace, Offshore, and Power This crack . . . . . . . grows at the same rate as this one
Generation industries if both experience the same stress intensity factors
PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-49 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-50

SUMMARY OF METHODS

Nf = Ni + Np
Total Life = Crack Initiation + Crack Growth

INTEGRATED
DURABILITY MANAGEMENT

S-N Local Strain LEFM

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-51 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-52
INTEGRATED DURABILITY MANAGEMENT ACTIVITIES INTEGRATED APPROACH TO DURABILITY

DESIGN Modern Facts:


Analytical
Loads
ANALYSIS
Integrated ● Testing is not a good way to optimize designs, but is always
Kinematic required for sign-off.
Modelling
Structural Integrity
Optimization Approach

DATA &
● Useful fatigue analysis requires verification and good test-based
CORRELATION CORRELATION
DATA information.
DEVELOPMENT
ANALYSIS
● Neither testing nor analysis have exclusively the “right” fatigue
Characterisation
MEASURED
DATA Correlation with FEA DATA
SIMULATION
answer; therefore its not an argument between rivals.
Assess Modifications
STRAINS & LOADS TEST

Measurement Verification
Validation DATA Monitoring ● Best results are obtained when an integrated approach is
Correction Correlation
adopted incorporating analysis and testing.

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-53 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-54

HOW TESTING SUPPORTS ANALYSIS HOW ANALYSIS SUPPORTS TESTING

● Provision of load data


● Eliminate unnecessary tests

● Provision of material fatigue properties


● Test acceleration

● Verification of stress/strain analysis results


● Gauge type selection and positioning

● Correlation of life predictions


● Test design

● Final sign-off

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-55 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-56
VIRTUAL DURABILITY ANALYSIS

● FE stress analysis is a pre-processing activity for durability


analysis

AN OVERVIEW OF ● The essential requirement is for good local stress


information in the critical areas
VIRTUAL DURABILITY
● Loading information can be:
● Assumed (idealized loading),
● Experimentally acquired
● Semi-analytical loads
● Computed (full analytical loads)

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-57 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-58

VIRTUAL DURABILITY ANALYSIS (CONT.)

Achieving Faster, Cheaper, Better in Integrated Durability


Management requires:
● Integrated multi-disciplinary teams.
● Integrated software tools common to all departments. “Engineering is the art of being approximately right
● Integrated data exchange within company structure. rather than exactly wrong.”
● Integrated data exchange between the company and
Prof. Rod Smith
its suppliers and service providers. University of Sheffield,1990

PAT318, Section 1, September 2008 PAT318, Section 1, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-59 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S1-60
SECTION 2
OVERVIEW OF MSC FATIGUE

PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-2

ANALYSIS OPTIONS IN MSC FATIGUE


WHAT’S IN MSC FATIGUE?

Analysis Options
● Analysis methods: ● Features:
Geometry & FEA Results ● Stress (total) Life
● Stress Life (S-N) ● Time-domain (quasi-static or Fatigue Life Contours
● Strain (initiation) Life
● Crack Initiation (E-N) transient analysis) 1500
DISPLAY OF SIGNAL: TEST101.DAC

7
Cross Plot of Data : S61STRAIN1KT

● Crack Propagation 6

Frequency-domain (forced or
5

● Fracture Mechanics ● Strain (uE)


4

● Vibration Fatigue
3

random vibration)

Kt( )
● Weld Fatigue 2

● Fast preview analysis -1500


0 Time (seconds) 12
● Multiaxial Fatigue
● Vibration Fatigue 1
1E3 1E4 1E5
Life(Miles)
1E6

● Design optimization & sensitivity Test (Lab) Results ● Spot/Seam Weld Analyzer
● Multiaxial Fatigue Sensitivity Analysis
analysis Strain Life Plot
● Software Strain Gauge and Optimization
● Software strain gauge
605M30
Sf': 857 b: -0.067 Ef': 0.636 c: -0.579

● Import from: Nastran, Abaqus, ● Utilities


● Integrated into Patran
DAMAGE HISTOGRAM DISTRIBUTION FOR : TRACK05.DHH
Strain Amplitude (M/M)

1E-1

ANSYS, Marc, I-DEAS, etc.


Maximum height : 4.8548 Z Units : %

1E-2

4.8548

1E-3 Damage
1E0 1E1 1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6 1E7 1E8 Z-Axis
Life (Reversals)
0 808.7
0

Materials & Loading


Mean
Range uE
uE Y-Axis
X-Axis
1574.7 -750.4

Information
PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 Damage Distributions
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-4
EXAMPLE OF RESULTS FROM MSC FATIGUE LIFE PREDICTION PROCESS
Contour plots: damage, repeats, factor-of-safety and
much more

STRESS OR
LOADS LIFE
STRAIN

PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-6

LIFE PREDICTION PROCESS: E-N APPROACH ELASTIC STRESS/STRAIN PREDICTION METHODS

● Time-domain:
MEASURED
● Quasi-Static method (with or without “inertia relief”)
STRAINS constitutive
model ● Transient method (direct or modal)

damage
STRESS &
STRAIN
model
LIFE ● Frequency-domain:
COMPONENTS ● Forced Vibration Response (transfer function method)

constitutive
● Random Vibration (PSD input to / output from Nastran)
model and notch rule
FEA STRAINS
(OR STRESSES)

PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-8
THE “FIVE BOX TRICK” OF FATIGUE ANALYSIS MSC FATIGUE ANALYSIS PROCESS

● Create/Import FE Model with Results (in Patran)


Loading ● Define Loading History
Data
● Define Fatigue Material Properties
● Set Up and Run the Fatigue Analysis
● Select Solution Parameters
Computer-Based Submit the Job
Geometry Life ●
Analysis ● Monitor the Job Progress
● Read in the Results
● Evaluate Life Prediction Results
Materials ● Read in the Results
Data ● Post-Process Life and Damage Results
● Optimize (what if studies)
Three Inputs The Analysis The Answer!
PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-10

VIRTUAL DURABILITY ANALYSIS & THE 5


QUASI-STATIC ANALYSIS
BOX TRICK
● Geometry: Stresses are dependent on geometry. ● Identify set of static FE loadcases and constraints to
● Loading: Loads from physical tests or from simulation. simulate service environment
● Material: Select material from database. S-N, E-N curves, etc. ● Measure or predict loading histories Pk( t )
● Analysis: Performed with geometry, loading and material data as input.
● Elastic stress histories calculated from linear
● Results: Post-processing of results.
superposition:

Geometry  σij,e,k 
σij,e ( t ) = ∑ P ( t ) P
k


Loading Analysis Results k  k,f ea 

Material
where k = loadcase ID
Optimization
PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-12
STRAIN COMBINATION, CYCLE COUNTING, ELASTOPLASTIC TRANSIENT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
CORRECTION AND DAMAGE CALCULATION
● Time histories of stress or strain calculated directly using
FE transient analysis.
[εij](t) Combination

εq(t) Cycle
Material Properties
Counting

Elastic Plastic
Range-Mean
Conversion &
Histogram
Damage Calculation
εq = Max. Absolute Principal
Signed von Mises
Signed Tresca LIFE
● Analysis driven by measured vertical forces, accelerations.
Component
PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-14

FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS VIBRATION FATIGUE METHODS


Frequency domain analysis can account for dynamic (resonant) effects
The PSD can be used to estimate the statistics of the stress
history and to estimate a PDF of stress range
Time Domain
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
(throw away phases) DISPLAY OF NOISE.PSD Total plot of file NOISE.CYH
Response variation

50
753.5
5 10 15 20 Response2
Hertz

RMS Power (MPa^2. Hz^-1)


1)

Time in seconds
Power Spectrum

Cycles
Frequency (Hz) 0 0
Frequency (Hz.)
0 1494.141 0 796
Inverse Fourier Transform (IFT) Range

(create random phases) Frequency Domain Original Title : Stress

PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-16
MSC FATIGUE WORKFLOW EXAMPLE: STEERING KNUCKLE
Time History Peak Valley Rainflow Cycle
Extraction Counting
Stress or Strain

Stress or Strain
FE Model

Time Time

100 MPa

60000
N

Life Damage Histogram Damage Counting


PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-18

EXAMPLE: STEERING KNUCKLE EXAMPLE: STEERING KNUCKLE


Load Histories Quasis-static Strain Calibration & Superposition
Force(Newtons) LOAD03.PVX
84.71
Sample = 1
FE Loadcase FE Loadcase Local Strain
Npts = 1610 Time Histories
Max Y = 84.71 Results Loads Histories
Min Y = -50.05
-50.05
0 500 1000 1500
point

Force(Newtons) LOAD02.PVX
7720
Sample = 1
Npts = 1610
Max Y = 7720
Min Y = -7998
-7998
0 500 1000 1500
point

Force(Newtons) LOAD01.PVX
3769
Sample = 1
Npts = 1610
Max Y = 3769
Min Y = -2654
-2654
0 500 1000 1500
point
This process is repeated for each node/element
Screen 1

PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-20
EXAMPLE: STEERING KNUCKLE MESH CONSIDERATIONS FOR FE-BASED
Stress Results FATIGUE
● FE stress analysis is a pre-processing activity for
durability analysis

● The essential requirement is for good local stress


information in the critical areas

● Global stiffness convergence of the FEA results is


necessary, but may not be good enough for use in
fatigue life prediction.

PAT318, Section 2, September 2008 PAT318, Section 2, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S2-22
SECTION 3
MSC FATIGUE USER INTERFACE

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-2

MSC FATIGUE MAIN INTERFACE MSC FATIGUE MAIN INTERFACE (CONT.)


● General Setup Parameters are used to define
generic parameters for the Fatigue job

● Jobname and Title are used to identify Fatigue


Jobs in Patran

● Specific Setup Forms are used to specify


parameters unique to fatigue analysis such as
material properties, load time histories, etc.

● Job Control is used to submit and monitor


fatigue jobs

● Import Fatigue Results is used to post-process


fatigue results
PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-4
ANALYSIS PROCESS THE ANALYSIS PROCESS - GEOMETRY
Quasi-Static, Strain-Life Example

Results from linear FEA give


load-strain relationship Geometry
Strain-life relationship used to
GEOMETRY calculate damage per cycle and
summed to give life
Strain time
histories
Rainflow Materials Analysis Results
cycle count POST-
calculated for ANALYSIS
MATERIALS & elastic- PROCESSING
each node by
plastic
linear
correction
superposition
Loading
LOADING

OPTIMISATION
Up to 100 simultaneous ‘load’ Optimisation
(Force, disp etc.) time histories
Critical nodes can be
PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 identified and re-analyzed PAT318, Section 3, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-6

ANALYSIS PROCESS: GEOMETRY (CONT.) ANALYSIS PROCESS: GEOMETRY (CONT.)


● Linear FE Results (stress/strain)
● Linear Static
● Transient Dynamic
● Stress Frequency Response
● PSD of Stress Components
● Use Results from a FE Stress Analysis
● FE Codes
● Nastran
● Import Nodes and Elements and
● Marc Stresses/Strains from the Results File
● Dytran (eg, OP2 or XDB for Nastran)
● Abaqus
● Use Model and Results Filtering to
● ANSYS
● LS-DYNA reduce Model size and Fatigue Analysis
● I-DEAS Run Times
● Others

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-8
THE ANALYSIS PROCESS - MATERIALS ANALYSIS PROCESS: MATERIALS INFORMATION

● Fatigue Material Properties


Geometry are created / reviewed by
clicking on the Database
Manager button

Materials Analysis Results ● The fatigue material


properties may be selected
by clicking on its name in the
material list box
Loading
● Clicking on the “OK” button
will save the specified
Optimisation properties and hide the form

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-10

ANALYSIS PROCESS: MATERIALS DATABASE ANALYSIS PROCESS: MATERIALS DATABASE (CONT.)


A typical S-N curve

S-N Data Plot


● Facilities for MANTEN_SN
SRI1: 3162 b1: -0.2 b2: 0 E: 2.034E5 UTS: 600
● Data Entry, Deletion, & Editing
● Searching on Descriptive Data Steel 1E4

● Database Entry Listing Aluminum


● Graphical Display

Stress Range (MPa)


1E3
● Multiple Material Designation:
DIN, SAE, ASTM, etc. Titanium
Copper 1E2

1E1
1E0 1E1 1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6 1E7 1E8 1E9
Life (Cycles)

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-12
THE ANALYSIS PROCESS - LOADING ANALYSIS PROCESS: LOADING INFORMATION
● Loading Time Histories
may be imported, created,
Geometry modified, and displayed by
clicking on the Database
Manager button

Analysis Results ● Result Parameters define


Materials
the stress analyzer’s result
details

● A Loading Time History is


Loading selected by clicking on the
appropriate name in the list
Optimisation box

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-14

ANALYSIS PROCESS: LOADING TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS PROCESS: LOADING TIME HISTORY
MANAGER MANAGER
DISPLAY OF SIGNAL: TEST102.DAC

● Facilities for: 1500

● Creation (waves, point by point,


graphical, etc.) A typical
load history
● Graphical Display and Editing Wind showing
● Arithmetic & Graphical Transmission random loading

Strain (uE)
sequences
Manipulation
● Graphical Cutting and Pasting
● Automatic Units Conversion Waves
● Searching
Suspension
● ASCII File Import
-1500
0 Time (seconds) 12

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-16
THE ANALYSIS PROCESS - ANALYSIS ANALYSIS PROCESS: SOLUTION PARAMETERS
● The Solution Parameter form is used
Geometry
to define fatigue analysis specific
parameters

● Form will change depending on


Materials Analysis Results method

● Clicking on “OK” will save the supplied


information for future retrieval
Loading
● Clicking on “Cancel” will close the
Optimisation form without saving the altered data
values
PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-18

ANALYSIS PROCESS: JOB CONTROL ANALYSIS PROCESS: STRESS-LIFE (S-N) ANALYSIS

● Fatigue Analysis Jobs are submitted Features S-N Data Plot


to the local “host” using the job control ● Rainflow Cycle Counting MANTEN_SN
SRI1: 3162 b1: -0.2 b2: 0 E: 2.034E5 UTS: 600
form ● Mean Stress Correction

● The Job may be monitored on a ● Welded Structures


1E4
● Statistical Confidence
regular basis Parameters
● Jobs may also be aborted from this ● Palmgren-Miner Linear
1E3

Stress Range (MPa)


form Damage Law
● User Defined Life
● Material & Component S-N 1E2
● Surface Conditions
● Factor of Safety Analysis
● Biaxiality Indicators 1E1
1E0 1E1 1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6 1E7 1E8 1E9
Life (Cycles)

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-20
ANALYSIS PROCESS: CRACK GROWTH (LEFM)
ANALYSIS PROCESS: STRAIN-LIFE (E-N) ANALYSIS ANALYSIS
Features
ε Strain
Features ● Cycle-by-Cycle Modeling
● Based on Local Strain Concepts ● Time-sequenced Rainflow Cycle
● Mean Stress Correction Counting
● Elastic-Plastic Conversion Time 1/2cycle ● Multi-environment Material
● Statistical Confidence Parameters 1/2cycle
1cycle Properties
● Palmgren-Miner Linear Damage 1cycle ● Kitagawa Minimum Crack Sizing
1cycle
● User Defined Life ● Threshold Modeling
1/2cycle

● Cyclic Stress-Strain Modeling


s ● Crack Closure and Retardation

● Surface Conditions ● User Defined Life

● Factor of Safety Analysis ● Fracture Toughness Failure


e Criterion
● Biaxiality Indicators
● Surface or Embedded Cracks
● Modified Paris Law

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-22

ANALYSIS PROCESS: MULTIAXIAL FATIGUE ANALYSIS ANALYSIS PROCESS: VIBRATION FATIGUE


● Handles proportional and ● Features:
non-proportional loadings Polar Plot of Data : DEMO
● Resolution of stresses
Theta=90 Theta=45

● Incorporates Mroz-Garud onto principal planes


90
model and energy based 120 60 ● Multi input loads Input
Loads
notch correction procedure ● Correlation effects using
● 6 critical plane damage 150 30
cross PSD’s
Construct FE model and
designate input and output

models including Wang- ● Stress tensor


nodes

Brown and Socie- 180 0 stationarity checks


Bannantine “shear” and 1E-9 1E-8 1E-7 1E-6

● Calculate fatigue life


“normal” models
-5
x 10

G xx Gxy Gxz 
p( 2.5
Ra
ng 2

from PSDs   e, 1.5


Me 1

Gxy G yy Gyz  an)


0.5
0

 Gzz 
400

High cycle (fatigue limit)


200
400 200

G xz Gyz
0


600
800 -200
Mean [MPa]
Range [MPa]

210 330
● Uses 7 solution Calculate 6 component Choose stress parameter and
calculations using the methods including: stresses at each output node Check stationarity of the compute PSD of stress at each
principal axes
Dang-Van and MacDiarmid 240 300
and compute the principal
stresses
output node

270 ● Dirlik
methods.
● Steinberg Fatigue Life
● Post-processing including Polar Plot of Type A and Type B damage for Wang-Brown Method

● Narrow Band solutions


polar damage plots
PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-24
THE ANALYSIS PROCESS - RESULTS ANALYSIS PROCESS: POST-PROCESSING RESULTS

● The Fatigue results for completed


Geometry jobs may be read into Patran

● The results may be displayed


Materials Analysis Results using standard Patran post-
processing functions:

● Results
Loading

● Insight
Optimisation

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-26

ANALYSIS PROCESS: POST-PROCESSING RESULTS ANALYSIS PROCESS: POST-PROCESSING RESULTS


(CONT.) (CONT.)

● Contour Plotting of:


Tabular Results of:
● Life Estimates
● Individual Nodes/Elements
● Log of Life
● Most Damaged Nodes/Elements
● Damage
● Statistical Summary of Damage Distribution
● Component Specific Life
● Interactive Results Interrogation of All Life and Damage
Units (Flights, Miles, etc.)
Estimates
● Factor-or-Safety
● Factor-or-Safety
● Multiaxiality Indicators
● Multiaxiality Indicators

● X-Y Plots of Sensitivity

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-28
ANALYSIS PROCESS: POST-PROCESSING ANALYSIS PROCESS: POST-PROCESSING RESULTS
RESULTS (CONT.) (CONT.)
Histograms
Cycles vs Damage
The 20 most damaged nodes

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-30

ANALYSIS PROCESS: POST-PROCESSING RESULTS


THE ANALYSIS PROCESS - OPTIMISATION
(CONT.)

● Fatigue results may be displayed by selecting the “Results” Geometry


switch from the top menu bar
● Fatigue results include
● Damage
Materials Analysis Results
● Log of Damage
● Life (repeats)
● Log Life (repeats)
● Life (User Defined Units) eg., Laps, Flights, etc. Loading
● Log of Life (User Defined Units)

Optimisation

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-32
ANALYSIS PROCESS: DESIGN OPTIMISATION ANALYSIS PROCESS: DESIGN OPTIMISATION (CONT.)

Localized Analysis for Evaluation of Alternative:


● Search for Better/Worse
● Surface Conditions
Material
● Material Types /
Parameters ● Allowables Based on
● Statistical Confidence Design Life
● Design Geometry ● Calibration to Test
● Loading Conditions Results
● Residual Stresses & ● Sensitivity Calculations
Stress Concentrations ● X-Y Plotting
● Mean Stress ● Histogram Plotting
● Design Life ● User Preferences

PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-34

MSC FATIGUE FILES


jobname.asc Fatigue Input file (ASCII)
jobname.crg Crack Growth Results file
jobname.cyh Cycle Distribution (histogram) at node/element n
*.dac Load Time History file
jobname.dcl Design Criteria-Life XY file
jobname.dyh Damage Distribution (histogram) at node/element n
jobname.fal Scale Factor-Life XY data file
jobname.fef Fatigue Results (multi-node) file
jobname.fes Fatigue Input file
jobname.fin Job parameter file (ASCII)
jobname.fos Factor of Safety Results file
jobname.fpp Fatigue preprocessing Results file
jobname.kfl Stress Concentration-Life XY file
*.ksn K Solution file
jobname.msg Fatigue Message file
jobname.sta Job Status file
jobname.tcy Crack Growth Analysis Time History file
PAT318, Section 3, September 2008 PAT318, Section 3, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S3-36
SECTION 4
OVERVIEW OF PATRAN

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-2

WHAT IS PATRAN? WORKFLOW IN PATRAN


The Main Form
● Patran is a CAE pre and post processing software 2 - Import Geometry 1 - Select Analysis Code
package. It consists of the following major
components:
● User-Friendly Graphical User Interface
● Powerful Geometry Import, Export, and Creation

● Robust Meshing Algorithms

● Fast Results Visualization and Reporting

● Extensive Analysis Code Preferences 2 - or Build Geometry 4 - Perform the


Analysis

3 – Create 5 - Evaluate and Publish


PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 Analysis Model Analysis Results
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-4
CASE STUDY: ENGINE PISTON HEAD CASE STUDY: ENGINE PISTON HEAD (CONT.)
● The following case study demonstrates how Patran is
used in a typical engineering application
● Design Specifications 1200 psi
● The design team has created a preliminary engine
design. Determine if the piston head has been designed
● Material: Steel
properly to withstand the pressure loading.
● E = 30 x 106 psi
● ν = 0.3

● Operating pressure = 1200 psi

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-6

STEP 1 – CREATE DATABASE & SET ANALYSIS STEP 2 – IMPORT OR BUILD GEOMETRY MODEL
PREFERENCE ● The user can import or build geometry in Patran:
● Import geometry models from CAD systems including:
● CATIA
● I-DEAS
● Pro/ENGINEER
● Patran can interface with ● Unigraphics
many analysis codes ● Import geometry models in standard formats:
● Parasolid xmt
● Select Nastran and
● ACIS
Structural Analysis for
this case study ● IGES
● STEP
● Build the geometry in Patran

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-8
STEP 2 – IMPORT OR BUILD GEOMETRY MODEL STEP 2 – IMPORT OR BUILD GEOMETRY MODEL
(CONT.) (CONT.)
● For this case study, the piston head geometry model is
● The piston head geometry is imported
available as a parasolid xmt file

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-10

STEP 3 – CREATE FE MODEL STEP 3 – CREATE FE MODEL (CONT.)

● Next, create the


FE model: Create the finite
● Create a finite element element mesh.
mesh
● Apply loads
● Apply boundary conditions
● Create material properties
● Create element properties

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-12
STEP 3 – CREATE FE MODEL (CONT.) STEP 3 – CREATE FE MODEL (CONT.)

Apply 1200 psi to


the top surface.

Constrain the two


cylindrical holes
at the piston-pin
interface.

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-14

STEP 3 – CREATE FE MODEL (CONT.) STEP 3 – CREATE FE MODEL (CONT.)

Define a material Create an


property for the element property
piston head. for the piston
head.

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-16
STEP 4 – PERFORM ANALYSIS STEP 5 – EVALUATE ANALYSIS RESULTS

Read the analysis


Submit the model to results into Patran.
Nastran for a linear
static analysis.

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-18

STEP 5 – EVALUATE ANALYSIS RESULTS (CONT.) STEP 5 – EVALUATE ANALYSIS RESULTS (CONT.)

Publish a stress
summary report.

Plot displacements
and stresses.

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-20
STEP 5 – EVALUATE ANALYSIS RESULTS (CONT.) SUMMARY OF PATRAN WORKFLOW
Patran

Pre-Processing
● Import/create geometry
● Create finite element mesh Solver
● Apply boundary condition
● Apply loads (MD Nastran)
● Create material properties
● Create element properties
● Submit model to solver ● Solve for displacements
● Compute strains
● Compute stresses, etc.

Create static,
Post-Processing
animated & VRML
images for reports ● Deformation plots
and presentations ● Stress fringe plots
● Reports

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-22

STARTING PATRAN PATRAN GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE

● Double click the desktop icon to launch Patran, or type ● The Patran GUI for the Windows and UNIX/Linux
Patran at the command prompt platforms are shown on the following pages. Except for
the color scheme and icon arrangements, the two GUIs
are basically identical.
● The course material will be presented using the Windows
GUI.

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-24
WINDOWS GUI UNIX/LINUX GUI

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-26

PATRAN GUI COMPONENTS PATRAN GUI COMPONENTS (CONT.)


Menu Bar

Undo - will undo the last command

Application Button
Abort - stops operation in progress
Status Icon
Tool Bar Reset graphics - clear everything except model
 Static Green indicates Patran is
waiting for user input
 Rotating Blue indicates Patran is Refresh graphics - re-draw what is on screen
performing a process which can
be stopped immediately with the
abort icon
History Window File Save
 Rotating Red indicates that
Patran is performing a process Display and Viewing
Command Line
which cannot be interrupted Icons
Print

Copy to Clipboard

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-28
THE MAIN VIEWPORT APPLICATION FORMS
Action
Display Mode Object

Current Group
Method

Current Viewport

Database Name

Select Menu
(Filter Buttons)

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-30

APPLICATION FORMS (CONT.) APPLICATION FORMS (CONT.)


Checkbox is an on/off
switch

Select databox is used to


enter data

Data insertion can be


made by placing the “...” Suffix denotes that
mouse at the desired a subordinate form will
location, clicking the left open up upon clicking
mouse button, and typing the button
in the desired data

Existing text can be


edited

Slide bar assigns a value to associated variable; i.e.


threshold for aspect ratio test

Apply causes action to execute


Control icon allows the switching between different actions;
i.e. icon can be set to highlight or split in this example
Hyphens indicate action can be
undone (only immediately) after
its execution Causes the content of a form to reset back to default values; Docked Undocked
PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 the default values may be constant or can change PAT318, Section 4, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-32
ENTITY SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION ENTITY SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION (CONT.)
● It is necessary to specify many entities, ● Vocabulary
e.g. Surface 1 3 5, in Patran forms ● Specification -- process of selecting interactively or manually typing
● The input to Patran form data boxes entity IDs.
include input for creating and editing ● Screen picking -- process of selecting entities through interaction with
the viewport and picking tools.
geometry, meshing and control of
● Select databox -- Motif (or Windows) widget which is used for entering
meshing, application of LBC’s, assigning
data.
element properties, creating groups of
● Input focus -- specification of the data box that the input is to be placed
entities, post-processing of results, in. The data box is specified by placing the mouse cursor over it and
plotting or erasing, etc. clicking. An “I” character is visible in the data box.
● There are numerous tools available to aid ● Select menu -- menu of icons to aid in filtering what is picked from the
in the interactive selection of entities for viewport.
data boxes. Sometimes manual ● Pick list -- the string of characters that are placed in the select databox.
specification is required. ● List Processor -- interprets the pick list.

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-34

ENTITY SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION (CONT.) CURSOR PICKING


● Single entity picking
● Move the mouse cursor near to the center of an
 Specification is done in two ways: entity, e.g. Element 7, then click the left mouse
 Keyboard (manual) entry into a databox, button. Element 7 turns orange. Selected entities
e.g. Curve List turn orange.
● The location to pick is dependent on the setting in
Preferences/Picking, e.g. Single Picking/Centroid
● Selecting again eliminates the current entity, e.g.
Element 7, and replaces it with a new entity, e.g.
Element 10
 Graphical/interactive (cursor) picking with
the mouse

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-36
CURSOR PICKING (CONT.) CURSOR PICKING (CONT.)
 Multiple entity picking  Rectangle picking of entities
 Move the mouse cursor near to the center of an entity, e.g.  Click with the left mouse button, starting at the desired
Element 1, then, holding down the Shift key, click the left location, and keep it pressed while “dragging” the
mouse button, and continue selecting entities, i.e. Element 5 mouse to form a rectangle
and 8. The three elements turn orange.  What is selected is dependent on the setting in
 The location to pick is dependent on the setting in Preferences/Picking
Preferences/Picking, e.g. Single Picking/Centroid
SHIFT
 Auto Execute must be unselected to use this feature

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-38

CURSOR PICKING (CONT.) CURSOR PICKING (CONT.)


 Polygon picking of entities  Deselect (“unpick”) entities that were picked
 Click with the left mouse button, holding down the Ctrl key,
 Hold down CTRL & Shift keys and then click, at the entity, with the
to start picking. Then, pick locations to define a polygon,
right mouse button
w/ or w/o holding down the Ctrl key. Also, can start picking
using the Polygon Pick icon in the select menu.  The entity, e.g. Element 7, will be removed from the data box
 A thick line will, from the start point to the current mouse  This can be done when there are multiple entities in the data box.
CTRL position, will always be displayed CTRL+SHIFT
Only the picked entity will be removed.
 Complete the polygon by clicking at the start location, or
double clicking
 What is selected is dependent on the setting in
Preferences/Picking

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-40
CURSOR PICKING (CONT.) ENTITY GRAPHICAL PICKING
 Individual and collective entity picking is controlled by
 Cycle picking – picking of overlapping entities the Picking option under Preferences
 Clicking with the right mouse button, while holding down the
Shift key, will cause another entity, that overlaps the  For Single Entity Picking a portion of the selected
entity must be within the physical limits of the cursor.
previously selected entity, to be selected
For Centroid Single Picking the entity closest to the
SHIFT location of the cursor will be picked. Entity is
recommended, and is the default.

 For Rectangle/Polygon Picking the entities picked


must be totally or only partially within the picking
rectangle or polygon. “Enclose any …” is the default.
“Enclose centroid” is recommended.

 Additional tools are available to aid the process of


picking, such as Cycle picking

 The Preselection Settings highlight the entity or label


(ID #) of the entity before it is selected

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-42

DATA BOX SYNTAX MANUAL ENTRY SHORTCUTS


Syntax / Format Description
Point 1 2 3 Refers to points 1, 2, and 3

Point 1:9:2 Points 1 through 9 by 2


 Abbreviations
Node 1:# All nodes in the database
 Point: point, pt
Curve 1 2, 3/4 Different forms for delimiters: space, “,” and “/”  Curve: curve, crv, c
Surface 3.1 References an entity associated with a higher order entity  Surface: surface, surf, s
(e.g. edge 1 of surface 3; an edge is similar to a curve)
Solid 1:10.2 Combinations of entity ID syntax is possible (face 2 of solids 1
 Solid: solid, sld, sl
through 10)
 Node: node, nde, n
[x y z] Square brackets signifies coordinate specification
 Element: element, elem, elm, el,e,
[xn28, 1, 2] Individual coordinates can reference existing entities, such as
x = the x coordinate of node 28 quad, bar, tri, tet, wedge, hex
[1, zp5, 3]
[1, z5, 3]
y = the z coordinate of point 5
When a point is referenced the letter “p” can be dropped
 Coordinate system: coord, cord, cf
[1, 2, ‘-64.0/20.0‘] Mathematical operations like division are possible to determine the
individual components
<R T Z> < > signifies a vector definition  Not case sensitive
{[x1 y1 z1 ][x2 y2 z2 ]} Signifies an axis with first point representing the base and the
second determining the direction

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-44
LIST PROCESSOR PICKING USING SELECT MENUS
 The List Processor verifies the syntax, checks for existence,  Select menus assist the user in picking specific entity types, or in
and performs rudimentary geometry operations, such as performing certain calculations “on-the-fly” (e.g. determine the location
determining the location of the intersection of two curves where two curves intersect)
 The select menu that is available depends on the type of operation that
 The List Processor parses the contents for the select is being performed, e.g. meshing a face of a geometric solid, so not
databox picking an adjacent geometric surface

 Curve 1:3 -> Curve 1 2 3

 The application only recognizes specific types of data

 The List Processor is generic and is used by all applications


for consistency
PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-46

PICKING USING SELECT MENUS (CONT.) PICKING USING SELECT MENUS (CONT.)
 A select menu only appears when a select data box has the mouse focus
 A typical select menu:  Picking a select menu icon can lead to another select menu

Toggle visible entities only selection (select only visible entities)

Polygon Pick

Sub-menu indicators and return


Default picking Any point
Point (pick only geometric points) Curve or Edge (of surface)
Filter
Node (pick only finite element nodes) Curve (no edges)
Curve Intersect (determines location of curve intersection) Edge (no curves)
Construction Two Points (defines a straight curve)
Point on Curve (determines location on curve nearest point)
Curve Segment
Filter Any Vertex (pick only geometric vertex, not point)
Surface Intersect
Pierce (location of intersection of surface and curve)
Construction Point on Surface (select surface for point to be on)
Screen Position (location on computer screen)
PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-47 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-48
PICKING USING SELECT MENUS (CONT.) PICKING USING SELECT MENUS (CONT.)
 Examples of select menus
 Picking visible entities only
 Entities that can be picked are only those that can be seen when the
model is displayed using hidden-line or shaded mode
 Example of visible only picking
 Select just the free faces of the hex elements on the outside of the
model

Geometry: Geometry: Finite Elements:


Create/Surface/Curve Create/Solid/Surface Sweep/Element/Extrude
 Rotate the model 180° about the Z-axis, and repeat the process
PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-49 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-50

PICKING USING SELECT MENUS (CONT.) MANIPULATING THE MODEL FOR VIEWING
 Picking visible entities only (continued)
 When visible entities only selection is selected (toggled on) the
following message appears

Click on one of these icons, then drag with the


middle mouse button

 Visible picking will remain active until it is unselected by the user


 Make sure to turn this off as soon as it is not needed !

Z Rotate XY Translate
XY Rotate Zoom

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-51 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-52
PATRAN ONLINE HELP PATRAN FILE MENU

● New Database Creates a new empty database


● Open Database Opens a previously created database
● Two ways to use on-line help ● Revert to Original Database Allows the deletion of all the changes
● Select “Contents and Index…” from the drop-down help menu to made in the current modeling session
(Revert must be enabled for this to be
get topical or searchable help available)
● Session... Execute Patran commands from a
● Press the “F1” key to get context sensitive help on an Patran form file
in question ● Close Close the current database but keep
Patran active
● Quit Close the current database and stop
Patran
● Save Saves the database up to and
including the last command
● Save a Copy Save a copy of the database under a
different name
PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-53 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-54

PATRAN FILES

Name File Type Comments


model_name.db Database One per model, relatively large

model_name.db.bkup Backup database Backup database is created if revert is enabled

patran.ses.number Session file A session file is opened at MD Patran start-up and it is


closed when MD Patran is quit.

model_name.db.jou Journal file One per database. A record of all PCL commands from
database creation to present - concatenated session files.
EXTREMELY useful for rebuilding a database.

model_name.out Neutral file Created using Export. Can be used as a backup for analysis
model.

PAT318, Section 4, September 2008 PAT318, Section 4, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-55 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S4-56
SECTION 5
GEOMETRY MODELING

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-2

TOPOLOGICAL STRUCTURES
● Patran combines topological structures to define geometry
● The topological entities within Patran are

Face

BASICS & DEFINITIONS Vertex

Body

Edge

● Vertices hold positions for an edge, face, and body


● All topological entities can be cursor selected to perform
Patran functions (e.g. Surface 10.2)
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-4
CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID
(CONT.)
● Create a 1x1x1 blue parametric solid:
● Click the Geometry Applications button. ● Your model should now appear as follows:
● Set Action/Object/Method to
Create/Solid/XYZ.
● Click Apply.
● Turn on the solid labels using

Solid 1 Exploded View


Look at topological definition
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-6

CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID
(CONT.) (CONT.)
● First, look at how the solid faces are topologically
● Display Point and Solid labels:
labeled:
● To display the labels, click on the icon

Solid1.4
Solid 1.4

Solid 1.2 Solid


Solid
Solid1.6
1.6 Solid1.2
1.2

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-8
CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID
(CONT.) (CONT.)
● Next, look at solid edges, e.g. Solid 1.2.3: ● While preparing to create a point using a solid vertex,
● In this example, six solid edges are picked.
delete Point 7.
● Under Geometry, set Action to Delete.
● Set Object to Any.
● Select Point in the Select Menu.
● Select Point 7 for Geometric Entity List.
● Click Apply.

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-10

CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID
(CONT.) (CONT.)
● Create a point at a vertex where Point 7 was. Notice ● Create parametric surfaces from the parametric solid,
that there are six coincident vertices, with one vertex e.g. one surface for u=0.5:
● Set Action/Object/Method to Create/Surface/Extract
per solid edge.
● Set the u Parametric Value to 0.5.
● Set Action/Object/Method to Create/Point/XYZ.
● Select Solid 1 for Solid List.
● Enter vertex Solid 1.2.3.2 in Point Coordinates List.
● Click Apply.
● Click Apply.
● Repeat these steps for v=0.5 and w=0.5.

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-12
CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID CASE STUDY: TOPOLOGY OF SIMPLE SOLID
(CONT.) (CONT.)
● Now, erase the solid to look at just the parametric
surfaces within the solid:
● Display/Plot/Erase
● Shade the three surfaces
● Click on the following icon.
● Enter Solid 1 for Selected Entities.
● Click Erase.
● What are the parametric coordinates of the point at
surface intersection?
● Ans. - (0.5, 0.5, 0.5)

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-14

TOPOLOGY OF GEOMETRY BUILDING BLOCKS: POINT (CYAN)


● Topology associated with the different types of geometry: ● A point is a 0-dimensional CAD entity. It
represents a location in space.
Point List Curve List Surface List Solid List
0D 1D 2D 3D ● Patran creates points automatically
when constructing curves, surfaces, and
Point Point 10
solids. Y
Curve Curve 20.1 Curve 20 ● Points are created at vertices, e.g. surface
(Vertex) vertices (“corners”)
● It is not always necessary to construct Z
Surface Surface 30.2.1 Surface 30.2 Surface 30
(Vertex) (Edge)
entities starting with these points, e.g.
surface from points 9 Y
Solid Solid 40.3.2.1 Solid 40.3.2 Solid 40.3 Solid 40
(Vertex) (Edge) (Face)
X
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 Z X
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-16
BUILDING BLOCKS: CURVE (YELLOW) BUILDING BLOCKS: SURFACES
P2
● Surface types can be simple (green) or P2
● A curve is a general vector complex/general (magenta). P1 ξ
function of the single parametric ξ1 2
ξ
P(ξ1)
● A simple surface is a general vector 2
variable ξ1 ; it can have many
5 function of the two parametric ξ
types of mathematical forms. 1 ξ
Z variables: ξ1 , ξ2 1 12
● (X,Y,Z) = function (ξ1) P1
ξ1 Y Z
ξ1,ξ2)
● (X,Y,Z) = function (ξ P(ξ1,ξ2)
X
● A curve has ● A simple surface has
Y
● 3 or 4 bounding edges P4 P3
● Two points, one at each end X
● A parametric coordinate (ξ1) whose ● A parametric origin and parametric Z Z
domain is from 0.0 at P1 (its origin) to coordinates whose domains are from 0 to 1 Y
1.0 at P2 ● A simple surface with 3 visible edges X

● Meshed with bar elements 5 has a fourth edge that is degenerate. Y


X
Bar Element
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-18

BUILDING BLOCKS: SIMPLE SURFACE (GREEN) BUILDING BLOCKS: COMPLEX SURFACE


(MAGENTA)
● A simple surface can be meshed with either the IsoMesh (mapped) ● A complex or general trimmed surface has more than 4
or Paver (free) meshers.
edges (N-sided) and can include inner boundaries
● Not defined parametrically, e.g. ξ1, ξ2 not used
Display line for Curve of constant Nodes follow curves of
visualizing surface parametric value constant parametric value ● It is a “trimmed” parametric surface
● Must be meshed with the Paver mesher
● Meshes along the perimeter of the surface first
Trimmed Surface
(General) (8 Edges) Paver Mesh of Surface
Perimeter
of surface
2/3 ξ1
1/3 ξ2

1/3

Surface 1 2/3 IsoMesh Mesh


Curves From Surface 1 of Surface 1
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-20
BUILDING BLOCKS: SIMPLE SOLIDS (BLUE) BUILDING BLOCKS: COMPLEX SOLIDS (WHITE)
● Complex or non-parametric solids (N-faced)
● Simple or parametric solid ● Non-parametric solids can be either Patran native B-Rep
● Vector function of the three parametric (boundary representation) or Parasolid B-Rep
variables P (ξ1, ξ2, ξ3) ● CAD solids can be accessed as Patran native B-Rep or Parasolid
P
ξ1, ξ2, ξ3 6 B-Rep solids, and can be meshed using the automatic TetMesh
P P
5 7 algorithm
● A simple solid has: P8 ● Meshes faces with tri-s, then perimeter of solid with tet-s first
● 4 to 6 bounding faces ● Similar to Paver mesher
● Parametric origin and coordinates whose ξ3 P
domains are from 0 to 1 ξ2
2
P
3 B-Rep Tetrahedral
● A simple solid with 4 to 5 visible faces P
1 Solid Mesh
has some degenerate faces. ξ1 P
4

● Parametric solids are meshed with the Y

IsoMesh (mapped) mesher to generate


X
hex, wedge, or tet elements. Z

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-22

BUILDING BLOCKS: PLANES & VECTORS


● Infinite planes and vectors are used for certain
geometric operations, such as solid break by a plane
● A plane is uniquely defined by vector representing its
normal and a point on the plane
● A Patran vector quantity is defined by a magnitude, a IMPORTING AND EXPORTING GEOMETRY
direction and a point of origin

Plane Vector
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-24
FILE IMPORT OPTIONS FILE IMPORT OPTIONS (CONT.)

Geometry kernel type

CAD part

Standard format

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-26

CATIA MODEL IMPORT CATIA V4 MODEL IMPORT


● CATIA V4 Model, CATIA Options… include
● Several types of CATIA files can be imported
● Import to Parasolid: Yes
● CATIA V4 Model: model file, e.g. dogbone.model
● Imported geometry will be Parasolid type geometry
● CATIA V5 CATPart: part file, e.g. catbone.CATPart
● Solid Type
● CATIA V5 CATProduct: product file, e.g. crockbone.CATProduct ● Select simple (6 faces) or B-rep solid
● CATXPRES File: output file, e.g. otherbone.cat ● Trimmed Surface Type
● Select simple (4 edges) or general trimmed
● Import NoShow Entities: Yes
● CATIA V4 entities classified as NoShow will be imported
● Import Attributes
● If Yes, attributes associated to the geometry will be
imported. If No, the import performance will be
improved.
● Entity Layers
● All layers, or selected layers, are imported
● Create Groups from Layers
● Creates Patran groups from CAD layers automatically
● Group name: prefix_Ln
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-28
CATIA V4 MODEL IMPORT (CONT.) CATIA V4 MODEL IMPORT (CONT.)

● CATIA V4 Model, CATIA Options… include


● CATIA V4 Model, CATIA Options… include
● Import to Parasolid: Yes (continued)
● Group Classification ● Import to Parasolid: No
● Displays dialog box for directing entities to Patran groups ● Imported geometry will not be Parasolid type geometry,
● Model Units
but SGM geometry (Patran native Solid Geometry Model)
● Allows the model units to be over-ridden ● Entity Layers
● All layers, or selected layers, are imported
● Sew Sheet Bodies
● PATRAN Sew: sew sheet bodies using Patran software ● Group Classification
● Verify Boundary: similar to Geometry: Verify/Surface/Boundary ● Displays dialog box for directing entities to Patran groups

● Equivalence Edge Vertices ● Create Groups from Layers


● Equivalence vertices during import ● Creates Patran groups from CAD layers automatically
● Group name: prefix_Ln
● Save Transmit File
● Save Parasolid xmt transmit file created during import
● Allow Duplicate CAD Model
● Allows a model, with same name as a model in the database,
to be imported

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-30

PRO/ENGINEER MODEL IMPORT PRO/ENGINEER MODEL IMPORT (DIRECT MESH)


● Two buttons
● Pro/ENGINEER CAD model import
● Direct Mesh for meshing Pro/ENGINEER solids

● Use Direct Mesh to mesh Pro/ENGINEER solid in


Pro/ENGINEER environment
● Pro/ENGINEER is executed
● Import to Parasolid -- create Parasolid or not ● Geometry is accessed in Pro/ENGINEER through its API
● Part -- individual part; need license ● Meshing is done using Direct Mesh
● Assembly -- set of parts; need license ● Resulting mesh is read into Patran database
● Primitive Geometry -- created from CAD import ● Must have Pro/ENGINEER installed, and have the Nastran
into Patran; no license needed preference in Patran
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-32
UNIGRAPHICS MODEL IMPORT EXPRESS NEUTRAL FILE
● Set Unigraphics as the Source ● Express Neutral files are intermediate files that
● Select desired UG part file are created during a specific CAD model
access, i.e. UG Express Translation, CATIA
● Optional filtering (Unigraphics Options…) of entities is Direct
available based on entity type (e.g. Sheet Body), Patran ● Express Neutral files are portable when created
groups from CAD layers, if sewing is to be done, etc. as text files
● Express Options provide capabilities such as
filtering entities, group creation, model preview

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-34

IGES FILE PATRAN DATABASE IMPORT


● IGES format
● Import to Parasolid: create Parasolid or not
● Patran database content can be transferred between
● Supports
different databases.
● Point
● Import option allows the specification of entity type, ID
● All curve types
offset, name prefix, and conflict resolution tools.
● All surface types, except Patran Composite
● B-rep solid ● Equivalence Option allows common entities in the
databases to be equivalenced.
● Preview option provides access to summary
information.

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-36
PATRAN DATABASE IMPORT (CONT.) PATRAN DATABASE IMPORT (CONT.)
● Patran databases can
be accessed by ● Importing options
selecting “Patran DB” (Patran DB
as the source. options) controls:
● Which entities to
import
● Specification of
entity ID offset
● Specification of
unique names,
e.g. prefix for
group names

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-38

PATRAN DATABASE IMPORT (CONT.) PATRAN NEUTRAL FILE


● Patran 2.5 neutral file
● Merged finite element and ● Geometry
● Parametric cubic geometry only, e.g ParametricBiCubic
geometry models may be
● Finite elements
equivalenced-Equivalence ● Nodes, elements
Nodes/Geometry ● Material and element properties
● Loads and boundary conditions
● Options on how Patran
will deal with Discrete
FEM Fields (discussed
later) on import

● Neutral File convention can be selected under


Geometry Representation in Preferences / Geometry
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-40
STEP FILE FILE EXPORT OPTIONS
● ISO 10303 STEP (Standard for the
Exchange of Product Model Data)
● Application Protocols (AP)
● AP 203: geometry and configuration controlled design
data
● AP 214: represents all types of geometry, including
pipe and harness data, and components
● AP 209: finite element model, including composites,
and results

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-42

FILE TYPES EXPORTED FILE TYPES EXPORTED (CONT.)

● Parasolid xmt file ● CATIA V4


● Specific types of parasolid geometry ● Specific entity types
● Curves ● Curves
● Surfaces ● Surfaces
● Solids ● Solids
● Can specify the parasolid version

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-44
FILE TYPES EXPORTED (CONT.) FILE TYPES EXPORTED (CONT.)
● STEP
● IGES ● Application Protocols (AP)
● Export through Parasolid: create a Parasolid ● AP 203
file or not ● AP 209
● Specific entity types ● AP 214
● Curves ● AP 203, 214 entities
● Surfaces ● Curves
● Solids ● Surfaces
● Nodes and elements ● Solids
● Coordinate frames ● AP 209 entities
● No results ● Limited geometry
● Select groups for export ● Mesh
● Analysis
● Results
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-46

FILE TYPES EXPORTED (CONT.)

● Patran 2.5 neutral file


● Specific entity types
● Nodes
● Elements
PATRAN
● Material properties GEOMETRY APPLICATION
● Element properties
● No results
● Parametric cubic geometry only
● Select groups for export

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-47 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-48
GEOMETRY CONSTRUCTION GEOMETRY “ENGINES” IN PATRAN
● Geometry can be constructed in Patran by
● Editing imported CAD geometry (e.g. Edit/Surface/Sew)
● Building with respect to existing geometry (e.g.
● There are two approaches that can be used in Patran
Create/Solid/Extrude) to create and edit geometry. They are “standard” and
● Creating copies of existing geometry (Transform) Parasolid:
Gliding a surface to create a solid ● Standard tools
Extracting a curve
● Use Patran unique code / libraries
● Has a long history of use
● Parasolid tools
Rotating
● Use Parasolid libraries in Patran
Mirroring ● Need Patran Parasolid tool license
● Pages with “Parasolid tool” indicated mean that the
approach described uses the Parasolid libraries

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-49 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-50

ACCESSING GEOMETRY FORMS GEOMETRY FORM ANATOMY

● The strategy behind working with the


geometry form:
● Set an objective, such as creating a point
● Provide the details associated with creating
● Create or edit geometry under the Geometry icon in the entity using the specified method
the Patran main menu.

Create Delete ... “Action”

Point Curve Surface Solid ... “Object”


XYZ
Extract
Interpolate
Point
Chain
Manifold
Curve
Trimmed
XYZ
Surface
Face
XYZ
... “Method”
Project Revolve Revolve Revolve
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-51 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-52
SELECT MENU CREATE / POINT / XYZ
Pick only geometry point or finite element node
● Create points at X, Y, Z location
Pick only geometry point
● Locations where points are to be created
Pick only finite element node
may be specified by either of the
following:
● Patran provides an entity selection filter. ● (X,Y,Z) coordinates (list of coordinates), e.g.
● When the cursor is placed in a list box, it causes [0 50 50] [0 0 70]
the filter selection menu to be displayed. ● Choose an icon from the select menu and
● Select menu icons filter entity selection; the only follow the menu prompts, e.g. Node
entities selected are a type of chosen filter icon.
● Selections available depend on what is being  3
 2
done, e.g. create a point using XYZ.  1
● option allows screen picking of only the entities
on the front of the model.
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-53 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-54

CREATE POINT
Create a point at
1 a
1 parametric location ξ1
1
a x 1
ξ1 3

GEOMETRIC ENTITIES: x
3
2
Create Point 3 at the
POINT center of an arc 2

1
2
x 3 x4 1
1
x 1
1 x5 7

2
Create points non-
uniformly on a curve
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-55 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-56 Create a point at the intersection of a curve and a surface
GEOMETRY TRANSFORM
SHOW / POINT / DISTANCE
Method* Comment

Translate Translate entity through a specified vector

● Provide distance between a point and Rotate Rotate entity about a defined axis through a given angle

other entity (i.e. point, surface). Scale Use a multiplicative factor applied to individual coordinate

Mirror Create a mirror image of the entity across a defined plane

Mcoord Transform entity in one coordinate frame into another with same relative position

Pivot Transform entity within a plane defined by a pivot and two points

Position Entity transformed to a set of destination-position-points will maintain its relative


position to a set of original-position-points

Vsum Vector sum of the coordinate locations of two sets of existing entities to create a new
entity

Mscale Existing entity is simultaneously moved, scaled, rotated and/or warped to a new
position using a rotation matrix

* Transform operations are for geometry types point, curve, surface, and solid.
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-57 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-58

GEOMETRY TYPES CASE STUDY: PARAMETRIC CURVES


● Patran has the capability of creating various types of geometry, for ● Create three points:
example: ● Select the Geometry Applications button.
● Implicit form, i.e. conic, elliptical ● Set Action/Object/Method to
● Explicit form, i.e. parametric cubic, Beizier, NURBS Create/Point/XYZ.
● Patran uses Neutral File convention to indicate that cubic
● Click Apply.
parametric geometry (parametric cubic geometry) will be created,
e.g. ● Create two more points using the following
coordinates: [2 2 0] , [1.50 0.75 0.00]
X = a0 + a1ξ1 + a2ξ12 + a3ξ13

with a similar equation for Y and Z


● Neutral File convention can be selected under Geometry
Representation in Preferences/Geometry
● Some geometry is created using only Neutral File convention, e.g.
Create/Curve/Point

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-59 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-60
CASE STUDY: PARAMETRIC CURVES (CONT.) CASE STUDY: PARAMETRIC CURVES (CONT.)
● Create a parametric curve with u=0.5 for the middle
point. ● Create a parametric curve with u=0.75 for the middle
● Set Action/Object/Method to Create/Curve/Point. point.
● Select 3 Point for Option. ● Set Action/Object/Method to Create/Curve/Point.
● Set the u value of the middle point to 0.5. ● Set the u Value of Middle Point to 0.75.
● Select Point 1 for Starting Point List. ● Click Apply.
● Select Point 3 for Middle Point List.
● Select Point 2 for Ending Point List.
● Click Apply.

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-61 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-62

CREATE CURVE
CREATE / CURVE / MANIFOLD
1 2
2
1 ● Manifold refers to creating new geometry
2 3 on (coincident with) existing geometry, e.g.
1 curve on surface from one point to another
Must use the select
1 point
menu for picking the
curve and point

6 7
2 6 2
3 1
2 5
3 1
Before
1 7
4 4 5 3

5 After
4
1 8 8
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-63 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-64
CREATE / CURVE / CHAIN AUTO CHAINING FEATURE
● Create a composite curve from two or more
existing curves and/or edges ● Provide user with an interactive, more
● It retains exactly all the information of the controllable way to chain curves
constituent curves ● Chaining starts by selecting a starting
Individual curves Chain (composite) curve curve
1 3

2 ● Decisions on how to proceed with the


chaining process are made through the
Chain curve used for toggles and buttons on the form, i.e. Next
trimmed surface (find another possible “path” for chain), or
9 5 11

8 6
OK (proceed along the current path)
7
10 4 ● Accessible from Create/Curve/Chain or
Create/Surface/Trimmed forms
3
Y Y
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Z X S5-65 Z X S5-66
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation

EDIT / CURVE / BREAK EDIT CURVE


● Creates two curves by “breaking” an
original curve or edge at a parametric
position along the curve between 0.0 and
1.0 Point 21 is
created at Must use select menu for Patran extracts points from
picking the curve and
parametric 0.4 all curves, then creates one
Trimmed surface 3 position along u
point spline curve from them
Edge 7 (or c1) direction Single curve;
2 complex math.
1 representation
21
0.4

3 3
Original curve
replaced by set The parametric coordinate for
parametric cubic
curves each curve is represented by
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 a line with a “1”
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-67 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-68
SHOW CURVE
1
2
1 1
1
2 GEOMETRIC ENTITIES:
Curve ID Start Point End Point Length Type Curve ID Start Point End Point Length Center Radius Type

1 1 2 1.414235 ParametricCubic 1 1 2 3.141593 [ 0. 1.75 0. ] 1. Arc


SURFACE
4 2
6
5 3
2
1 1 2 3
1 2 4
1
3
Curve ID Start Point End Point Length Type
First Curve ID Secon Curve ID Angle Minimum Distance Minimum Location1 Minimum Location2
1 1 2 1.4 ParametricCubic
1 2 45. 0. [ 0.5 0 0 ] 1on>. [ 0.5 0 0 ] 1on>.
2 3 4 0.4 ParametricCubic
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 3 5 6 0.9 ParametricCubic PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-69 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-70

CREATE PARAMETRIC SURFACES COMPOSITE SURFACE


● One composite surface created from a set surfaces
● Meshing will ignore the original interior vertices and edges
Original Surfaces Composite Surface

Curves must be non-


intersecting (non-touching) Curves must be end-to-end

Composite Surface
with Mesh

Must use the select menu for


picking both surface and point;
fillet is parametric bicubic.
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-71 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-72
CREATE COMPOSITE SURFACE CREATE COMPOSITE SURFACE (CONT.)

● A composite surface is created from multiple surfaces


● Useful for coarse meshing a region of numerous surfaces ● Preview Boundary
● Can use parametric composite surfaces to create Curve or
● Can use Preview Boundary to see
parametric solids, which can be hex meshed Edge if continuous boundary (white)
● User defined boundary features such as vertices, inner exists around perimeter of
loops, and curves at perimeter gaps (Preview surfaces; if not, can add (create)
Boundary) curves, or remove curves or
edges from list on the “fly” to
● Vertices
define desired outer perimeter
● Use All Edge Vertices – all vertices at outer perimeter of
surfaces in Surface List ● Select menu can only be used to
● Vertex List – if you only use some vertices, e.g. create pick curves or edges, or 2 points
parametric surface to define a curve
● Inner Loop Option – All, None, Select (some)

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-73 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-74

CREATE COMPOSITE SURFACE (CONT.) COMPOSITE SURFACE EXAMPLE


Four Non-congruent Trimmed Composite Parametric Composite
Surfaces Surface Surface

● Options can be used to assist


. .. . . .. . . .
surface creation
● Perimeter (boundary) gaps less .. ..
.. . .. ..
than Cleanup Tol. will be closed
● Gap Distance is similar to
Cleanup Tol., except it refers to
. .. . . .. . . .
gaps between internal edges of ● Create composite surfaces ● …continued
surfaces ● Surface 1:4 ● Preview Boundary
● Surface type ● Add (Two Points icon)
● Trimmed: use All Edge Vertices ● Select point pairs at all 4
● Simple: use four corner vertices outside perimeter gaps
● Options ● Remove (Curve or Edge icon)
● Clean up Tol.=0.071 ● Select all 8 interior edges

● Gap Distance=0.071

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-75 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-76
CREATE MIDSURFACE FROM SOLID P-SHAPES
● Various surface shapes may be
created
● Create surface midway through the ● Rectangular
● Quadrilateral
thickness of portions of a Parasolid ● Triangular
solid ● Disc
● Cylinder
● Use for “shell meshing” a solid
Manual ● Cone
● Two modes for creation ● Sphere
● Paraboloid
● Automatic
● Box
● Specify the thickness of the regions for
Automatic ● These surfaces may be edited
which surfaces are to be created
● Properties such as diameter or
● Manual axis- of-revolution may be
modified
● Two faces of a given solid between
● FEs updated automatically
which a mid-surface is to be created
must be specified
● Solid Face List – a face
● Offset Solid Face List – opposing face
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-77 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-78

EDIT SURFACE EDIT SURFACE (CONT.)


Parametric
1 Point 35 Surface 6
2 Trimmed
1 1
3 Surface 8
with hole

4 Parametric
5
surface
3 6 without
hole
2 Trimmed surface
Surfaces have continuous slope with hole

Parametric
Trimmed Surface 4
Surface 2
Complex 1 2
mathematical Remove
representation Point 44 vertex

New
1 2 vertex
Set of bicubic surfaces
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 replaces original surface PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 Trimmed surface Parametric
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-79 Can be used simultaneously with all surfaces Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-80 surface
EDGE MATCH SURFACES TRANSFORM SURFACE: MIRROR OPTION
● Mesh continuity requires
● First, select the appropriate select menu
adjacent surfaces to be
icon – coordinate direction 1
congruent
● Then, click on local Coordinate System 1 in
● Two non-congruent
the viewport to specify the mirror plane to
surfaces may be
be coincident with the local YZ-Plane
“matched” along adjacent
edges ● Next, select the geometry to be mirrored
Before After
● Congruency can also be
enforced using
Edit/Surface/Break
Z Y Z Y
● Edit/Surface/Sew All surfaces have four 1
edges 1
includes Edge Match and
Add vertex to X X
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Edit/Point/Equivalence Surface 1 at point 5 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-81 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-82

VERIFY SURFACE BOUNDARY


● Plots free and non-manifold surface
edges in model
● Free edge: no congruent adjacent surface
edge (magenta circle)
GEOMETRIC ENTITIES:
● Non-manifold edge: shared by more than two
surface edges (blue dot) SOLID

Free edge

Y
X
z
Non-manifold edge

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-83 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-84
CREATE SOLID CREATE SOLID BY EXTRUDING

● Extrude a surface (or solid face)


to create a solid
● Select to create either a
IsoMeshable
Use non-intersecting
parametric surfaces to create Use set of any type of surfaces to
TetMeshable (Parasolid B-rep) or
parametric solid create an Patran native B-rep solid IsoMeshable (parametric) solid
● If you select TetMeshable, the
TetMeshable
surface can be parametric or
trimmed
Use 5 parametric
surfaces to create
● If you select IsoMeshable, the
6 faced
parametric solid
surface must be parametric
● Parasolid tool
Glide a parametric surface along a
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-85 curve to create a parametric solid Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-86

CREATE SOLID USING PRIMITIVES EDIT SOLID


● Create Parasolid B-rep solids of various
Method Comment
basic shapes Break Break a solid into multiple solids using a selected option such as a surface, parametric location, etc.

● Shapes are Block, Cylinder, Cone,


Blend Create a set of cubic parametric solids from a set of parametric solids such that the first derivative of shape is
Sphere, and Torus continuous across interfaces
Disassemble Disassemble a B-rep solid into a set of surfaces (may be parametric or trimmed)
● Parasolid Solid can be created quickly Refit Replace an existing complex shaped parametric solid with a set of simple cubic parametric solids. The extent to which
using this form, or it can be created the new solids match the original solid depends on how many solids are created. Can also create a parasolid solid.
Reverse Reverse the parametric directions associated with the solid
manually using Geometry/Create/
Boolean Add, subtract, or intersect parasolid solids. Parasolid tool
Solid/B-rep (get Patran native B-rep
Solid), then refitting to create a parasolid Edge Blend Create fillets or chamfers. Parasolid tool

B-rep solid Imprint Break parasolid faces at edges of other solids. Parasolid tool

● Primitive solid can only be meshed with Shell Remove space from parasolid solid to create walls. Parasolid tool

the TetMesher
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
● Parasolid tool PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-87 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-88
EDIT SOLID BY REFIT EDIT SOLID BY BOOLEAN
● Solids to be combined can be Patran
● Three ways of editing a solid native B-rep, Parasolid B-rep solid, and/or
parametric
● Option To TriCubicNet causes a set of
cubic parametric solids to be created to ● Solids could have been created in Patran
represent the original solid or imported
● Refit parameters u Density, v Density, w ● Boolean operations are Add, Subtract, and
Density, where Density is used to specify Intersect
the number of solids that will be created in
the u, v, w direction ● Any combination of solid types results in
● Option To TriParametric is similar to
creating a Parasolid B-rep solid
To TriCubicNet except that a tolerance is ● Parasolid tool
used instead of u Density, etc.
● Option To Parasolid causes a parasolid
solid to be created from the original solid 1 2 Add 3
● Parasolid tool

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


B-rep Parametric B-rep (from Add)
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-89 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-90

DEFINING COORDINATE FRAMES


Z Z φ

P(R, θ, φ)
P(R, θ,Z)
B P(X,Y,Z) B B
C C C θ
GEOMETRIC ENTITIES: Z Z R θ
A A θ
COORDINATE FRAME X
Y
A
R
Y
θ φ
X R R

Rectangular Cylindrical Spherical


XYZ RθZ Rθφ
● The 3 axes for each coordinate system are generically
referred to as the 1, 2, 3 axes with the above
definitions.
PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-91 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-92
CREATE COORDINATE FRAME CREATE COORDINATE FRAME ALIGNED
WITH SURFACE NORMAL
Method Comment
● Creates a rectangular
3Point Create a coordinate frame by defining an origin, a point along axis 3 and a point in the Coordinate Frame 7
1-3 plane coordinate system
Axis A point on axis i and another on axis j
● Origin at a point on a Y Point 5
Euler Three consecutive rotations about user defined axes Z

Normal Specify an origin and a surface


surface or solid face 7 X
5
● Coordinate frame axis
3 aligned normal to Surface 1

the surface or face


● Coordinate frame axis
1 aligned with either
Y
parametric directions Z
2
1
X

PAT318, Section 5, September 2008 PAT318, Section 5, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-93 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S5-94
SECTION 6
FINITE ELEMENT MESHING

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-2

FINITE ELEMENT MODEL


FINITE ELEMENTS
● A finite element model of a component or system is a ● Finite elements come in different shapes and forms
mathematical representation of it using small, but finite
sized, simply shaped, connected entities ( i.e. line, surface,
solid) called finite elements.

Component (Geometric Model) Tetrahedral Mesh of Geometry


Bar Tri Quad

Tet Wedge Hex

● Linear (first order) and parabolic (second order) elements


PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-4
INTRODUCTION TO FE MESHING TOPOLOGY AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
● Meshing a model consists of several tasks:
● Create appropriate geometry
● Parametric or non-parametric
● The Patran Finite Element application handles issues related
● Remove unneeded features, e.g. small corners to mesh topology, e.g. which nodes are connected together
● Specify the element topology (e.g. parabolic) and size by edges
● Specify a mesher, e.g. Paver, for each region ● The physical properties associated with the topology will be
● Specify how the meshers will be controlled handled in the Patran Properties application, e.g. 2D bending
shell element or 2D solid plane strain element
● Patran has several meshing algorithms:
● IsoMesh (mapped mesher)
● Paver (free mesher)
● TetMesh
● Sweep mesh
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-6

MESHING ALGORITHMS
ISO (MAPPED) MESHER

● The iso-mesher (IsoMesh) is used to mesh


● All curves (parametric) (yellow)
IsoMesh Mesh ● Simple (parametric) surfaces (green)
Sweep Mesh ● Simple (parametric) solids (blue)

● Geometry must be parametric


● Nodes are placed at the intersection of curves, of
constant parametric value, and of surfaces
● If geometry is not parametric, IsoMesh cannot place nodes

Paver Mesh TetMesh Mesh


PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-8
STEPS IN CREATING AN ISOMESH STEPS IN CREATING AN ISOMESH (CONT.)
● The IsoMesher determines the number of elements across the width
● All IsoMesh mesh paths are identified by the IsoMesher (edges) of each mesh path, based on the following priority:
● An IsoMesh mesh path is a set of topologically parallel ● Adjoining meshed regions that are topologically congruent
geometric edges (e.g. non-intersecting edges) ● Mesh Seeds on an edge (controls creation of nodes on curve or edge)
● Global Edge Length (GEL)
● Note: Number of elements is independent between mesh paths

ξ2c
a c b
ξ 2b (ξ1 , ξ 2 )
b b b
a a a
ξ2a Node
ξ2
ξ1a
Gap is larger than ξ1 ξ1b ξ1 d

ξ1c
Global Model Tolerance

In the example above, Surfaces 1:2 are congruent, Surfaces 2:3 are  The IsoMesher determines the physical location of each node to be
congruent, and Surfaces 4:5 are congruent. However, Surfaces 3:4 created using the vector function defining the shape of the geometry, e.g.
are not congruent. Two of the individual mesh paths are labeled “a” (X,Y,Z) = function (ξ1, ξ2)
and “b”. There are five other mesh paths.  The IsoMesher creates the nodes and “element” connectivity
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-10

USING MESH PROPERTIES ISOMESH EXAMPLE OF SURFACES


Mesh seed Adjacent mesh
Adjacent meshes Edge mesh controlled controlled
on surfaces 1 and 2 seeded
GEL controlled

5 5
1 3 1 3

2 4 6* 2 4 6*

*Surfaces 1:6. Surfaces 1 and 3, and 3 and 5 are congruent. Thus, Surfaces
1,3, and 5 are part of a mesh path. The corresponding mesh is congruent. Before surfaces are meshed After surfaces are meshed

● When no mesh seeds or adjoining mesh occur in a mesh path, the


global edge length and the longest edge in the mesh path determine
the number of elements per edge as follows -
● Number of elements = length longest edge/GEL

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-12
PAVER (FREE) MESHER FOR SURFACES PAVER (FREE) MESHER FOR SURFACES
(CONT.)
● Used with all surface types, simple (green) and complex Before During After
(magenta).
● The Paver meshes along the surface boundary (perimeter)
first, then moves spiraling into the interior; the Paver does not
follow parametric directions, e.g. ξ1, ξ2
Before Meshing During Paver Meshing After Meshing

● The number of elements per edge is based on the following


priority:
● Adjoining meshed regions that are topologically congruent
● Mesh Seeds
● Global edge length
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-14

ISOMESH VS PAVER MESH ISOMESH VS PAVER MESH (CONT.)

IsoMesh Paver
● Surface must be parametric – ● Any surface, including N-sided
3 or 4 sided IsoMesh
● Parameterization not used
● Parameterization followed ● Interior elements are not
● Interior elements are controlled by edge constraints
controlled by edge constraints ● Interior associated (hard)
(e.g. mesh seed) geometry is recognized Surface 36
● Interior associated (hard) ● User control
geometry not recognized
● Curvature check for curved
● User control surfaces
● Different smoothing ● Min./Max. element edge
algorithms lengths
Paver
● Can select different element
patterns, e.g. triangular
elements on surface
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-16
ISOMESH VS PAVER MESH (CONT.) ISOMESH VS PAVER MESH (CONT.)
Paver Parameters MESH PARAMETERS
Mesh seed point ● If tris needs to be created,
(control point)
create minimum number
● Curvature check causes
mesh refinement at curved
boundaries
● Control of internal element
size.
IsoMesh Parameters
● Specify mesh smoothing
parameter values and
mesh patterns

GEL = 1/4 GEL = 1/2 GEL = 1/3


1. First, this surface (1)
2. Second, this surface (3)
is meshed using
Paver is meshed using
3. Lastly, this surface (2)
IsoMesh; notice the
is meshed using Paver mesh seeds are
All surfaces are 1 x 1 (matched existing identical, but meshes
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation meshes) S6-17 are quite different Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-18

TETRAHEDRAL MESHER FOR SOLIDS


TETRAHEDRAL MESHER FOR SOLIDS (CONT.)
● Solid mesher, TetMesh, generates tetrahedral elements for solids
defined with an arbitrary number of faces (Patran native or
Parasolid B-rep solid) ● Robust and fast
● Uses Delauney algorithm
● Uses tri mesh on faces to generate tetrahedral elements in ● Global parameters for meshing
the interior of the solid. Patran performs the following:
● Meshes vertices, meshes edges, meshes faces, meshes solids ● Global edge length
● Create P-element mesh allows elements with greater
distortion
● Internal coarsening creates larger elements at solid interior
● Curvature check creates more elements at curved geometry,
Tet meshes into the
e.g. more elements on fillets
interior of the solid
Tri element
using tri meshes as
meshes all
solid faces
seed – tet-s from tri-s ● Allows excellent mesh control
first, using ● Creates meshes congruent to adjoining meshed regions (2D
Hybrid or 3D) that are topologically congruent
mesher
● Creates meshes that follow mesh seeds on solid edges
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-20
SWEEP MESHER GEOMETRY CHARACTERISTICS IN MESHING
● Sweep a lower order element (or node) through space to
create higher order element, e.g. a quad is swept to
create a hex ● Geometry characteristics which affect creation of finite
● Several sweeping techniques are available (Extrude, elements include parameterization, connectivity, and
Glide, etc.) to handle complex configurations topology
● Parametric representation of geometry involves defining a local
coordinate system in which any point within that geometric entity
Glide 1D to create 2D
can be located
Glide curve
● Connectivity defines geometry orientations such as surface
1D bar normals and edge order
elements ● Topology describes the adjacency relationships between
geometric entities

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-22

GEOMETRY CHARACTERISTICS: PARAMETERISATION GEOMETRY CHARACTERISTICS: CONNECTIVITY

● Imported geometry may exhibit irregular parameterization ● Connectivity effects element and node ID order as well as element
normal/CID orientation
● Original geometry
● Irregular display lines ● IsoMesh-ed surfaces
follow surface parametrics
● Irregular element pattern which are based on
● Mesh smoothing will fix this connectivity
Display Lines
● Refit surface ● Node and element
number patterns are
● Geometry: Edit/Surface/Refit based on connectivity
● Better but still irregular ● Element local coordinate
● Mesh smoothing will fix this frames are based on
● Refit curves, re-create surface ● Element connectivity
● Geometry: Edit/Curve/Refit ● Surface connectivity
● No irregularities exhibited ● Surface parametrics
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-24
GEOMETRY CHARACTERISTICS: TOPOLOGY ASSOCIATING POINTS AND CURVES
Geometry: Verify/Surface/Boundary ● Associated points/curves are used for controlling meshing of
● Topology defines adjacency regions (including interior) of the model
relationships. Edges of surfaces
are termed topologically ● Only the Paver mesher recognizes associated points/curves
congruent if they occupy the inside surfaces
same model space including ● Associated points/curves are regular geometric entities that
their vertices.
have been associated with parent geometry
● Topological congruency Surface quad
determines whether coincident meshed
nodes are created at interfaces.
● Verify/Surface/Boundary checks Surface
for free and non-manifold edges. created by Face quad
If free edges exist internal to the extruding meshed
model then these entities are Curve 1 up 1
topologically incongruent. Hex mesh
created by
sweeping quad
elements down
Edge of surface associated with the face of solid
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 Incongruent Topology Congruent Topology PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-26

POINT ASSOCIATE / DISASSOCIATE CURVE ASSOCIATE / DISASSOCIATE


● Associated points are used to guide the meshers
● Points can be associated with curve and surface geometry ● Associated curves are used to guide surface meshing
● Associated points are a restriction to the meshers ● Associated curves can be mesh seeded
● Only the Paver uses associated points interior to surfaces ● Associated geometry is a restriction to the meshers
After Paver Meshing
● Only the Paver uses associated curves interior to
After Association
surfaces
● Can only associate curves which are within the global
model tolerance of surfaces
● Associated geometry can be disassociated
After Association After Paver Meshing

● It is only possible to associate points to curves or surfaces


which are within the global model tolerance of the points
● Associated points can be disassociated
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-28
ACCESS ELEMENTS FORM IN PATRAN FINITE ELEMENTS FORM

 Set an Objective, such as


creating a mesh
 Provide the details to complete
the task, e.g. element type
● Create finite element (topological) meshes for curves,
surfaces, and solids under the Elements icon
● Verify the quality of the mesh
Create Transform ... “Action”

● Modify by remeshing or editing the meshes Mesh Seed Mesh Node Element ... “Object”
● Connect elements, if needed Uniform
One-Way Bias
Two Way Bias
Curve
2 Curves
Surface
Edit Edit
... “Type”
Curve Based Solid

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-30

WHERE TO START WITH MESHING MESH SEEDING

● Things to consider before meshing a model ● Mesh seeding on curves or edges is used to control the
number and size of elements generated for the model
● Check if the model has special features that may simplify its
representation as an F.E. model, i.e. symmetry. ● Also, it is used for transitioning a mesh between different
● Determine if there are regions of the model that can be ignored densities
for meshing (i.e. ignore some small features that otherwise might ● Patran has different methods to generate the seeding
force the overall mesh to be much finer).
● Determine the size of the elements by inspecting the dimensions ● Uniform seed bias (equally spaced nodes)
of the model and any critical features. ● Non-uniform seed bias (variable spacing)
● Are there any critical areas where the mesh should be finer? ● Curve based seeding (automatic in highly curved regions)
● Choose the type of element (i.e. shell versus solid) that is best ● Tabular, including using existing nodes
suited for the nature of the model and the loading on it.
● PCL function

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-32
MESH TRANSITION USING SEEDS NON-UNIFORM MESH SEED BIAS

 Mesh seeds are useful in mesh transition


Surface 1
Transition control of IsoMesh with
mesh seeds Less abrupt transition

Abrupt transition

Mesh Ratio = 4

1 1
2

Surface 2

(1) (2)
(1) (3) (2)
Note: (1) seeded for 2 elements
Two Surfaces Mesh Ratio = 0.25 (or -4)
(2) seeded for 6 elements
(3) seeded for 4 elements Cyan arrows indicate positive edge direction
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-34

CURVE BASED MESH SEEDING TABULAR MESH SEEDING


● Variable or Uniform distance along a curve
● Length Ratio dictates the ratio of the length
of adjacent elements ● Arbitrary distribution of mesh seed
● Order of element to be created along a curve/edge
● Linear causes more mesh seeds to be ● Location can be defined in real or
created parametric space
● Sort seed location in ascending order
● Reverse seed locations
● Create mesh seeds at existing nodes or
points and if desired, assign them to
the edge of an adjacent surface or solid
● Refine mesh based on chordal tolerance
● Max h, or Max h/L
● Specify minimum and maximum element length,
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
or minimum and maximum number of elements PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-36
CREATING A 2D MESH FROM A 2D MESH CREATING A 2D MESH FROM A SET OF
SURFACES
● Meshes using an existing
congruent 2D mesh ● The Sheet Body mesher can
create a quality mesh for a set
● Uses existing mesh, not of congruent geometric
geometry
surfaces, that contain sliver
● 2D elements must be and/or skewed surfaces
connected
● Time consuming effort to
● Features for controlling the modify surfaces can be
required in order to produce
meshing a satisfactory mesh
● Mesh with QUAD4 or TRI3 ● The set of surfaces must be
elements congruent
● Feature recognition ● Surfaces in the set can be
● Hard node, hard bar, soft bar simple or trimmed
● Mesh refinement of a region ● In this example, the mesher
ignored the internal surface
● IsoMesh a region
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-37
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 edges
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-38

ADVANCED SURFACE MESHER ADVANCED SURFACE MESHER (CONT.)

● ASM Capabilities (continued)


● Advanced Surface Mesher (ASM) Capabilities
● Automatic and manual tools for set of surface
● Handles complex surface models meshes
● Non-congruencies ● Fill holes and gaps
● Gaps ● Make congruent
● Overlaps ● Stitch gaps
● Slivers ● Break face
● Small edges ● Merge faces
● Delete faces
● Provides optional global and local editing tools to
● Auto correct
accommodate meshing with specific requirements
● Added meshing enhancements to
● Recognize features
● Support hard points and hard curves

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-40
ASM BENEFITS MESHING PARAMETRIC SOLIDS

● Benefits
● IsoMesher is used with any parameterized
● Drastically reduce analysis modeling time solid, i.e. ParametricTriCubic, ExtrudedSolid
● The part(see surface) can now be meshed in less than a ● Same IsoMesh Parameters … as for surfaces
minute
● With other methods it would take at least 30 minutes
● Solids (set of) should be congruent for
congruent mesh creation
Gap
● Material will be assigned in the Properties
application
Non-congruent
surface edges

● Reduce cost
● Increased productivity
● Build quality finite element models with minimal user
interaction
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 Congruent Simple Solids Hex Elements from IsoMesh
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-42

TETMESHING SOLIDS
ISOMESH VS TETMESH
TetMesh B-rep Solids ● Original Parasolid solid as imported into
Patran
Parasolid Solid
● Set of Parametric solids
created from original solid
● IsoMesh of Parametric
solids
● Additional work to create
Parametric solids, but with
Parametric Solids
IsoMesh Hex elements
● Specify element topology
● TetMesh Parameters… allow control over the ● Auto tetmesh (TetMesh) of original Parasolid
mesh generation solid
● Input List is used to specify geometric solids (e.g. ● Less work to TetMesh than IsoMesh
Solid 1:14) or 2D elements (e.g. tri elements)
TetMesh
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-44
TETMESH TWO SOLIDS SIMULTANEOUSLY TETMESH TWO SOLIDS SEPARATELY
2
2

● Make the two solids congruent


● The two solids are not congruent
using something like imprinting,
● Create a continuous tet mesh Geometry: Edit/Solid/Imprint
1 through both solids by TetMesh- 1 ● TetMesh cylinder, Solid 2, first
ing both solids simultaneously using Global Edge Length of 0.75
● Select Solid 1 and 2 for Input List ● TetMesh block, Solid 1, second
● Select Assembly Parameters… using Global Edge Length of 2.0
● Select Match Parasolid ● Select Assembly Parameters…
Faces ● Select Match Parasolid
● Select Solid 1 or 2, or Faces
both, or leave List blank ● Select the solid already
meshed, Solid 2
● The meshes are equivalenced
automatically – the tet elements at ● The resulting TetMesh-es must be
the interface are connected equivalenced manually if the tets
are to be connected
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-46

TRANSFORMING ELEMENTS & MESHES


TETMESHING USING SURFACE MESH ON SOLID
● Transform constructs new elements by
performing a rigid-body or curvilinear translation
● Mirror: Reflect Elements and Nodes about a
mirror plane
● Translate: rigid-body or curvilinear translation
● Rotate: rigid-body rotation

Tet meshing volume with just 2D triangular elements


(no quadrilateral elements permitted)
● Create 2D mesh with IsoMesh and/or Paver for
all surfaces that bound the entire volume
● Equivalence nodes to connect all adjacent
elements together Mirror Plane
● Verify there are no elements with free edges
● Orient all element normals so they are pointing
outward
● Select bounding 2D mesh for Input List
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-47 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-48
SWEEP MESHING SWEEP MESHING (CONT.)

● Sweeping creates higher dimension


elements by sweeping lower dimension Extrusion
elements through a prescribed path direction
● Nodes to Bars, Bars to Quads, Quads to (Vector)
Hexes
● Several sweep methods are available, i.e.
Arc, Extrude, Glide, Vector field, etc.
● Sweeping is applied to base mesh (set of
elements specifying cross-section)
● Used for constant cross-section
● Number of elements through thickness is ● Direction Vector is the direction of extrusion
determined by the Mesh Control form ● Extrude Distance is the total distance to extrude
● Can generate non-uniform mesh through (“thickness”)
thickness
● Mesh is not associated with geometry
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-49 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-50

EDITING ELEMENTS EDITING ELEMENTS (CONT.)

● The Finite Element application has many tools to


● FE: Create/Element/Edit
create finite elements without using a mesher
● Element Shape and Topology are
● Create allows the user to create elements by selected from the form
selecting existing nodes, points, or vertices ● Pattern allows for creation of elements
on the face or edge of higher
dimensioned element
● Quad and Tri from element face
● Bars from element edge or
piecewise linear

Quad elements
skinned from hex Bar elements
faces generated on
element edges
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-51 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-52
EQUIVALENCING EQUIVALENCE: MERGING NODES
Before During After
● Replaces nodes to tie elements together 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16

7 8 9

● User can select to delete higher or lower node IDs 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12

● User can select to not collapse elements or to 5


4

6
5
1
7
6

8 5 6
1
7 8 5 6
1
7 8
collapse them 2 1 2 3 2 2
1 1 1
● Equivalence algorithm is controlled by a tolerance 1
29
2
30
3
31
4
32
1
29
2
30
3
31
4
32
1 2 3 4

parameter 16 17 18

25 26 27 28 25 26 27 28 25 26 27 28

● Changes propagate through all selected FEM data 13 14


2
15
2 2
21 22 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22 23 24

10 11 12

17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20

Use cube or sphere to


establish closeness
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-53 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-54

EQUIVALENCE FORM EQUIVALENCE FORM (CONT.)


● Collapsed Node Options (continued)
● Equivalencing can be done using All (the entire ● Allow Collapsed Elements
model in the database), Group (selected groups), ● The equivalencing tolerance is not changed,
or List (a specific list of nodes) allowing some elements to be collapsed
● $# The current value for the equivalencing
● Node Id Options: keep lower or higher node IDs tolerance, 0.3, will cause the collapse of at least
element 27. Processing will continue with the
● Collapsed Node Options collapsed element.
● Allow Tolerance Reduction ● Stop on Collapsed Element
● No matter how large the tolerance is set ● The equivalencing tolerance is not changed,
Patran will not collapse an element edge, e.g. and the nodes are not equivalenced
quad shape to tri shape, because the
● $# The current value for the equivalencing
tolerance will be reduced automatically as
tolerance, 0.3, will cause the collapse of at least
needed element 27. Processing will stop to allow the
● $# The current value for the equivalencing situation to be addressed.
tolerance, 0.3, would cause the collapse of at
least element 27. The equivalencing tolerance ● The equivalencing tolerance is either specified by
will be reduced automatically to 0.18 to prevent the user, or defaults to the global model tolerance
this.
● Tolerance Cube is the recommended method (because
● Selected nodes can be excluded from Equivalencing
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 of the speed of processing)
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-55 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-56
IRREGULAR MESHES IRREGULARITY CHECKS
● Irregular meshes (elements) usually
occur with ● General mesh/element checks
● Irregular geometry ● Boundary or “Crack” detection

● Mesh transition ● Elements Duplication


● Normals
● Irregularity or distortion is measured
with respect to a basic shape, i.e. ● Nodal connectivity
square, isosceles triangle, cube ● Jacobian
● Distorted elements generally result in ● Element specific distortion checks
less accurate answers
● Deviation form basic shaped elements, i.e. taper
● It is the USER’S RESPONSIBILITY to
carry out element quality checks to ● Curvature and singularity tests for quadratic
specify the maximum allowable elements
distortion
● Color-coding based on node or element ID
numbers
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-57 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-58

VERIFY / ELEMENT / BOUNDARIES VERIFY / ELEMENT / BOUNDARIES: FREE EDGES


Hex mesh example:

● Plots the boundary as free edges, or optionally, as free


faces
● Free edge/face of an element is the edge/face of the
element not common (tied) to others Hex mesh Free edge display Free edge display* after
before equivalencing equivalencing
* What would happen if the geometry were not congruent?
● Cracks or free edges appear along geometric boundaries Dashed
(blank) area
prior to equivalencing Tet mesh example: Solid line indicates
only one tet
indicates
more than
one tet

Tet mesh Free edge display Free edge display after


PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 before equivalencing equivalencing
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-59 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-60
ELEMENT DISTORTION CHECKS NON-CONGRUENT MESHES

During Check After 59.57


● Non-congruent meshes are the result of
56.35
53.13
meshing non-congruent geometry
49.91 ● Approach before meshing
46.69
43.47 ● Associate surface vertex points to
40.26
37.04
adjacent surface edges
33.82
30.60
● Create mesh seeds at element
Y 27.38 nodes, assigning them to an
X Z
Y
Z
24.16 adjacent surface edge
X 20.94
17.72
14.50
● Approach after meshing
11.28 ● Create and mesh a tessellated surface
Elements exceeding Everything above the threshold ● TetMesh (from auto tet mesher)
threshold will be highlighted will be color-coded to the improvement
and listed in the history box highest spectrum color ● TetMesh adjusted/modified based
(default is red) on Collapse Ratio and/or minimum
● Plot Failed Elements Only can be used to Jacobian value
create a group of failed elements ● For either parameter, user
specifies Acceptance Value
34.3659

30.0802 ● Manual editing, e.g. move nodes and


32.2694
equivalence
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-61 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-62

USING HARD POINTS TO CREATE CONGRUENT


MESHES CONGRUENT MESHES USING AUTO HARD POINTS
Coincident vertices
● Associating points to
adjacent surface ● Create hard points 1 2
edges will cause automatically (quickly)
created meshes to
be congruent ● Good if have a need for
many hard points – good
● All surfaces must be if many areas of 3
meshed incongruency
simultaneously
Associate vertex points ● Specify the following No vertex
● Of course, the same Before auto hard point
mesher Global Edge Associated (hard) point ● “T” point tolerance is
Length will be used (Target Element Edge
Length)/20 1 2
● Can use Finite
Elements/Create/ ● Surfaces for which
Mesh Control/Auto auto hard points may
Hard Points be created
3

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Auto hard point
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-63 Congruent surface meshes Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-64
One auto hard point
CONGRUENT MESHES USING TABULAR SEEDING MODIFY MESH: NODE / MOVE
● Create mesh seeds on ● Node modification tools
adjacent surface edges
● Move a node from one position to another
● Use nodes of existing
● This tool can be used to fix non-congruent meshes
meshes Gap = 0.1

● Tolerance must be > the


distance between Pick these nodes Pick this edge
adjacent surface edges,
e.g. 0.11
● Created surface
meshes will be aligned
because they will follow
seeds on their surface Mesh seed
edges

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-65 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-66

MODIFY MESH: NODE / OFFSET MODIFY MESH: NODE / PROJECT


● Node Offset - moves a node along a
defined vector by a given magnitude
● Example ● Node project; Project onto
● Move a node to produce a less skewed ● Curve – project using the closest
element approach to a curve or edge
● Create vector by “Tip and base points” icon
● Surface – projection along normal to
● Magnitude is calculated upon selection of surface that passes through node, or
two nodes, 1.2205, reset to 0.12205 for 10% specify a vector to project along
increments.
● Select node to move ● Plane – same as for surface
● Linear movement

Vector direction

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-67 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-68
NODE EDITING EXAMPLE NODE EDITING EXAMPLE
● Use node editing to realign the nodes on Edge 3 of
Surface 1 with the nodes on Edge 1 of Surface 2 ● To change the location of a node, first
identify its new location by specifying
coordinate values or by using the select
menu options for Node Locations
● Using Node List, identify the node to be
relocated
1
2
Before After
1st click 15
15,4
Y
2nd click 4
Z
X

PAT318, Section 6, September 2008 PAT318, Section 6, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-69 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-70

NODE EDITING EXAMPLE MESHING SUMMARY

● Patran provides many meshing tools to generate a finite


element model
● Different meshers
● Mesh control tools
1 2 ● Sweep/transform tools
● Editing tools

Y ● An understanding of the geometry tools and


Z
X
characteristics of the geometry will make meshing easier.
● Mesh control tools are to be used prior to meshing to help
Final node editing result
achieve the desired result.
Question: How many nodes are there along the common
boundary between Surface 1 and Surface 2 ? ● Editing tools allow the user to modify a mesh to achieve
Also, how could equivalencing be used to do the
an improved mesh.
PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
same thing ? PAT318, Section 6, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-71 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S6-72
SECTION 7
VIEWING & DISPLAY

PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-2

VIEWING VIEW TRANSFORMATIONS


Transformation
control
Translation and Rotations parameters
Zoom actions about axes

Fit View

● Orients view of model in the viewport


● Translation, rotation, zoom
● Fitting model in screen
● Local zoom
● Along vector
● Clipping (cutting) model
● Changing the view does not alter the model These parameters also affect mouse settings
PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-4
FIT VIEW AND SELECT NEW MODEL CENTER RECTANGULAR ZOOM AND ZOOM FACTOR
● Fit View fits model into viewport Use tool Select Corners
● Move viewport’s focal point to mouse-defined location to zoom into a display
region
● Choose Select Center from the pull down menu, move cursor to the
selected point and click left mouse button

Current window
Current window
Original center
Select
Fit View Select Corners
Center

New window
New window
New center

PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-6

SPECIFY VIEW BY ANGLES USER DEFINED VIEWS


● Change the view of model by changing the view angle of
rotation about the axes of either the global or screen coordinate Y
system
“View” terminology
Model - Global model axes stay fixed to Z
X Default view
the model
Screen - Screen axes are fixed to the
graphics screen
Absolute - Rotations relative to the zero Y
rotation position X Top view
Relative - Rotations relative to the current
position Z
X
Y
● Screen axes are fixed to
graphics device and Z
never move Side view
Typical icon
● Model axes are “body-
fixed” and move with the ● Standard model views can be selected for display
model
● Custom views can be created and stored for future reference
PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-8
CLIPPING PLANES VIEWPORTS

● What is a Viewport?
● Graphics window
● Clipping planes can be created, displayed,
modified, or deleted using the Arbitrary ● Has a unique name (shown in the banner)
Clipping… form
● Clipping planes can be created using a ● Has an associated view
direction/location, vector, or plane ● Any number of viewports may be created and posted
● Clipping planes can be specified to move ● Each viewport can be moved, resized, iconified, posted and
with the model unposted
● Multiple clipping planes may be active
PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 concurrently (maximum of 6 at one time) PAT318, Section 7, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-10

WHY USE VIEWPORTS? CREATING VIEWPORTS


Different groups in Different views of
separate viewports same groups
Front Isometric

Geometry FEM

Different pieces of
your model in
Different results in separate viewports
different viewports –
each with its own range
Part

Whole
PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-12
CURRENT VIEWPORT VIEWPORTS & GROUPS
● Any number of groups may be assigned to a viewport
● The Current Viewport is the
● Viewport in which view commands will be applied ● Only one group is current per viewport. Each viewport may have a
different current group
● Viewport in which titles will be posted box_beam.db - viewport_1 - fem_temp- group

● Viewport in which post-processing will be done


● Only one viewport can be current at a time
● To change Current Viewport
● Click in the area just inside the outer border to make a posted
viewport current
● Or, Viewport/Modify/Change Target Viewport/…/Make Current box_beam.db - viewport_2 - View_2_fem2- group box_beam.db - viewport_3 - fem- group

Posted Viewport
Current Viewport

PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-14

DISPLAY OPTIONS ENTITY TYPE DISPLAY


● Modify entity
display properties
● Model Render
Style applies to
all entities
● Shade Color
applies to all
entities
● Display tools are used to organize and enhance the appearance of ● Colors of each
the model in viewports Entity Type are
unique for each
● Two types of display modes: entity
● Entity mode targets entities by type (i.e. all curves are yellow, all
quads are white) ● Show or hide
● Group mode targets by group (i.e. default group is wireframe, bracket Entity Labels
group is shaded yellow) ● Label Font Size
● Display type is global (affects all open viewports) applies to all
● Only one type of display mode may be used at a time entities
PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-16
GROUP DISPLAY PLOT/ERASE

● Unclutter graphics
● Modify display properties display by temporarily
by group
removing entities from
● Select a set of groups
the display
● Render style
● Shade color ● Actions affect only the
● Labels on or off display
● Label size ● Settings will not be
● Toolbar, quickpicks saved when the
● Unique for a given group database is closed
Toolbar, quickpick ● Erase is different from
button for plot/erase
Delete

PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-18

PLOT/ERASE EXAMPLE HIGHLIGHTING


● Find any posted entity by entering its name and ID
number (i.e. Element 32) …
● Find entities associated to other entities using
Tools/List/Create.
● Highlight color is modified under Preferences/Graphics.
● Dynamic highlighting can be turned on under
Preferences/Picking.
Hidden line plot when geometry Hidden line plot with only the
and FEM overlap(at the same FEM displayed (geometry
location) erased)

● Select Display, then Plot/Erase


● Click on
● Repaint the screen
PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-20
GEOMETRY ATTRIBUTES GEOMETRIC SHRINK AND DISPLAY LINES

● Geometric properties may


be altered to enhance
display (i.e. display lines,
chordal tolerance,
parametric directions,
entity colors and labels)
● Toolbar, Quickpick buttons Before

Display Point Labels


Lines Size

After
PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-22

FEM ATTRIBUTES FEM ATTRIBUTES (CONT.)

● Display: Finite Elements ● Display: Finite Elements


● Number of line segments per edge ● Element shrink
● Element shrink
● Show only free
● Edges
● Faces
● Node size
● Colors and labels
● Coordinate frames

PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-24
FEM ATTRIBUTES (CONT.) LBC/ELEMENT PROPERTY ATTRIBUTES

● Display: Finite Elements ● Display: Load/BC/Elem. Props


● Show only free ● LBC display toggles
● Faces ● Colors
● Show on FEM only
● Vector attributes
● Beam display
● Pin DOFs
● Spring DOFs
● Coordinate frames

PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-26

LBC/ELEMENT PROPERTY ATTRIBUTES (CONT.) LBC/ELEMENT PROPERTY ATTRIBUTES (CONT.)

● Display: Load/BC/Elem. Props ● Display: Load/BC/Elem. Props


● Show on FEM only ● Beam display

PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 PAT318, Section 7, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-28
TITLES SPECTRUMS
162.5
162.5

158.1
158.1 ● Color spectrum can be
153.6
153.6
149.1
modified to improve
Transient - Thermal Analysis of a
149.1
Simple Plate Model 144.7
understanding of results
144.7
140.2 and other distributed
140.2 Adiabatic Top Edge

135.7
135.7 quantities
100 < T(t) 131.3
131.3

126.8 100 F
T(t) < 162.5
126.8 ● Continuous tone fringe
122.3
(Constant) 122.3 plots can be rendered and
Linear
117.9 Variation 117.9
113.4
the interpolation between
Y 113.4
Y 108.9
any two colors controlled
108.9
Z X
104.5 Z
Adiabatic Bottom Edge
104.5 (e.g. 2 = quadratic)
X
Before After 100.0
100.0
● Modified color spectra can
● Type Title in Target Title listbox
● Select Title Color and Font Size
be created, named and
● Select Create saved for current and
● Move Title to desired position using cursor while future use
PAT318, Section 7, September 2008 form is open PAT318, Section 7, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S7-30
SECTION 8
GROUPS AND LISTS

PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-2

INTRODUCTION TO GROUPS EXAMPLES OF GROUPS


● What is a Group?
● Allows geometric and FE entities to be divided into separate groups ● Any subset of model
for various modeling and post-processing tasks ● A collection of entities
● A group named “default_group” is created automatically when a ● Separate groups for geometry & finite elements
new database is created
● Newly created items automatically become members of the current
group Geometry Elements
● Any number of groups can be created, and entities may belong to
more than one group
● Groups become permanent members of the database
● Name of current group is displayed as part of the Viewport banner ● Create subsets when working with large models

Middle Ends
Total
PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-4
GROUP TERMINOLOGY GROUP MANIPULATION

● Current group
● Getting beyond “default_group”
● Group into which newly created entities are placed
● Only one group may be current at a time
● Current group is always displayed(posted)

● Target group
● Group that will be acted upon
● Modify Target Group, e.g. Remove entities
● Modify the appearance of the Target Group under Display/Entity
Color/Label/Render
● Manipulate groups by clicking Group in the main menu bar
● Posted group
● Group options can be selected from the Group pull down menu, or
● Group is displayed in a viewport from the Action choice of the Group form
● A group may be posted to more than one viewport
● More than one group may be posted to a viewport
PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-6

CREATING A GROUP CREATING A GROUP (CONT.)


● Choose Group/Create, or change the Action to
Create in the Group menu Select Entity Select the desired entities from the screen
Property Set Select element property set names (user specified),
● Assign new group name i.e. prop_1, prop_2
● The default is to make the new group the Property Type Select element property type, i.e. 2D shell, 3D solid
Current Group (new entities assigned to) Loads/BCs Set Select load and boundary condition set names, i.e.
lbc_1, lbc_2
● Use the Group Contents options to select group
Loads/BCs Type Select load and boundary condition types, i.e.
member categories, i.e. Add Entity Selection, displacement, force
Add All Geometry, Add All FEM, Add All
Material Select material set names, i.e. matl_1, matl_2
Orphans, Add All Entities
Element Topology Select element topology, i.e. hex8, quad4
● Loads, boundary conditions, coordinate frames, Element Shape Select element shape, i.e. 2D, 3D, bar
fields, load cases and results are not group
Element ID Specify element number range, e.g. start ID = 1, End
members ID = 327
MPC Type Select MPC type, i.e. RBAR, RBE2
Boolean Perform set operations on contents of groups, e.g.
operation of union on groups group_A and group_B

PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-8
DISPLAYING A GROUP MODIFYING GROUPS

● Choose Group/Post, or change the ● Select a Target Group for modification


Action to Post in the Group menu ● Use “Rename…” to rename the target group
● Choose which groups are to be posted ● Member List to Add/Remove buttons and
in the current viewport Global Add/Remove buttons modify the target
group’s members
● A single mouse click will highlight one group
● Selectable Members switch will allow the group
● Drag for continuous selection to be visible and selectable. Turning this switch
● Hold down <shift> to select a set of off will allow the group to be visible, but not
continuous groups in series selectable.
● Hold down <ctrl> to select non-contiguous
groups

PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-10

MOVING OR COPYING GROUPS SET CURRENT GROUP


● Used to transfer entities between groups rapidly
● Select “Move” if you want the entities to be
moved to “To Group”
● Select “Copy” to duplicate entities in both, ● Set Current
“From Group” and “To Group” ● Make a group current by highlighting its
● Indicate the entities you wish to transfer with name
the “Selected Entities…” button
● Making a group current will post it to the
current viewport
● Entities created will be assigned to current
group

PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-12
TRANSFORMING GROUPS TRANSFORMING GROUPS (CONT.)

● Transform members(entities) of groups ● Transforming can be done using Copy


● Select transformation method, i.e. Translate, ● Copy causes transformed (copied) entities to be
Rotate placed in the chosen group, i.e. Original, New,
Current
● Transform entities in Selected Group(s) ● Loads/BCs and Element Properties can be
Groups are selected under Select Group(s) transformed
● Transforming can be done using Move
● Move causes transformed (moved) entities to
remain in original groups
● Loads/BCs and Element Properties can be
transformed

PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-14

DELETING GROUPS NOTES ON GROUPS

● Can delete any group except the current ● The current group is always displayed
group (posted)
● Option given to delete only the name of a ● The only way to have more than one
group (keep entities) render style displayed simultaneously is
● Deleting entities in a group will remove them to be in the “group display mode”
from the database, regardless of possible
membership in other groups ● Group display is a useful tool when
● Entities which are exclusive to a deleted group post-processing. Different results can be
name will become orphaned entities plotted using different render styles
(deformed shape = wireframe,
von Mises Stress = fringe, etc.)

PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-16
LISTS CREATING LISTS
● Create two lists: List A: all nodes at X = 18.0 (+ 1.0 tolerance)
List B: all elements associated with the nodes in List A

● Create a list of entities based on given criterion


● Lists can be used as input for various Patran applications, such as
Application Regions for element properties
● Criteria for list creation are
● Attributes, such as location, results value, assigned properties
● Create List B
● Association with other entities, such as Points, Edges, Elements,
Groups, etc. ● Elements
● Create List A associated with
● Lists are not stored in the database, but can be added to a Group nodes in List A
● Nodes at X = 18 + 1 ● When using a list
as input, enclose
the List name in
PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 back quotes (e.g.
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-18 `lista`)

BOOLEAN OPERATIONS ON LISTS BOOLEAN EXAMPLE

● Boolean operations are used to manipulate lists


● Intersection operation finds items common to both lists

● Union operation combines items in both lists

● Results of subtracting one list from another

● Plot von Mises ● Plot temperatures


● Example stress
● Create List B
● Create List A
● Find elements with a von Mises stress result value > 20,000 ● Find elements with
psi and a temperature result value > 300 Fo ● Find elements a temperature
with a von Mises greater than 300 Fo
stress greater
than 20,000 psi
PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-20
BOOLEAN EXAMPLE (CONT.)

● Use Boolean operation to create List C


● Contents of List C are all elements with a
von Mises stress greater than 20,000 psi
and temperature greater than 300 Fo

PAT318, Section 8, September 2008 PAT318, Section 8, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S8-22
SECTION 9
MATERIALS

PAT318, Section 9, September 2008 PAT318, Section 9, September 2008


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-2

MATERIALS MATERIAL PROPERTY CREATION


● Material properties are entered in an easy to
use template customized to the selected
analysis code
● Three methods can be used to specify
● Material model is a named group of individual properties material properties
● Materials can have multiple constitutive models (e.g. Elastic, ● Manual Input (i.e. enter E, ν, ρ in the forms)
Plastic, and Creep material properties, all assigned to one ● Materials Selector (i.e. import material data using
material name) Mvision
● Externally Defined (i.e. create only the material
● Material data can be obtained directly from the Mvision
name label, then, input the data in solver input
material database through the Materials Selector file)
● Materials can be defined to vary as a function of temperature,
strain, strain rate, time, and frequency
PAT318, Section 9, September 2008 PAT318, Section 9, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-4
SUPPORTED ELASTIC STRUCTURAL MATERIAL MATERIAL PROPERTY CREATION (CONT.)
MODELS
● Variable properties
● Isotropic Isotropic structural material (2 Elastic Constants) are defined using
● 2D Orthotropic 2-Dimensional orthotropic material (6 Elastic fields
Constants) ● Change Material
● 3D Orthotropic 3-Dimensional orthotropic material (9 Elastic Status is used to
Constants) activate/deactivate
● 2D Anisotropic 2-Dimensional anisotropic (6 Elastic Constants) constitutive models
● 3D Anisotropic 3-Dimensional anisotropic (21 Elastic Constants) ● Existing materials
● Composite Various composite material models may be used as a
Laminate Composite (with a choice of stacking template to create
sequence convection) new materials, i.e.
Rule of Mixtures use session file or
Five Halpin-Tsai Models
template database
Short Fiber (1-D and 2-D)
PAT318, Section 9, September 2008 PAT318, Section 9, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-6

MATERIAL DATA INPUT ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING


MATERIAL MODELS
● First, the constitutive model of
interest must be selected ● Click on the button
● Linear Elastic
to obtain the form shown here
● Nonlinear Elastic ● Existing constitutive models of a
● Creep material will appear in either the
● The property value data boxes are Active or Inactive list boxes
customized for the analysis code ● Selection of a constitutive model
and the constitutive model used from a list box would move it to the
● When an input databox allows the other list box. (e.g. from Active to
use of a field, the field list box will Inactive)
appear, e.g. Temperature ● Only active constitutive material
Dep/Model Variable Fields models will be used by Patran
PAT318, Section 9, September 2008 PAT318, Section 9, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-8
EXTERNALLY DEFINED MATERIALS MATERIALS SELECTOR AND MVISION

● Used to define set names for ● Materials Selector provides direct access to material data
proprietary material properties where stored in any Mvision databank
material constants are loaded into ● Mvision uses a relational database in which the material
the solver input file (e.g. *.bdf file) data is stored in a spreadsheet tabular format
externally to Patran ● Attributes are displayed through the “Column Headers”
● The material name created can be ● “Query” sets criteria to sort materials data
used in the physical property ● Allows fast search of material properties
(Element Properties) specifications
● Exports material data automatically to solvers such as
● Input Properties are ghosted out as
Nastran, Marc, Abaqus, etc.
the user is not allowed to enter
● Provides for conversion of units from the databanks into
material data inside Patran
the solver’s units
PAT318, Section 9, September 2008 PAT318, Section 9, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-10

MATERIAL SELECTOR QUERY SHOW MATERIAL PROPERTIES


● Criteria can be set to
filter irrelevant materials
from the Materials
Selector list ● Created material properties can
● Combinations of be verified using the Show Action
attributes and operators
● Material properties are shown in
can be used to build the
query command tabular form
● Material compliance or stiffness
matrices can be shown

● Example:
CNAME like ‘*Alum*’ and YS_T > 7e4

● Query command can be entered directly in Material


Selector Query Panel form
PAT318, Section 9, September 2008 PAT318, Section 9, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-12
STIFFNESS/COMPLIANCE MATRIX STORING MATERIAL PROPERTIES
● The status of each of the constitutive models may be shown
There are at least two ways this can be done
● Material stiffness/compliance may be inspected
1. Store material data in session file(s)
a. At any time, begin recording to a new session file, File/Session/Record/Apply
b. Enter material data into Patran database, e.g. Materials: Create/3D
Anisotropic/Manual Input
c. When creating material set(s) is completed, stop recording to session file,
File: Session/Record/Stop
d. The material data can be specified in a database by using File:
Session/Play…
2. Store material data in a new Patran template database
a. Create a new Patran database using an empty Patran template database,
base.db
b. Load Patran solver preference at Patran command line, e.g.
load_mscnastran()
c. Create material set(s)
d. Close database and save it as a new template
PAT318, Section 9, September 2008 PAT318, Section 9, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S9-14
SECTION 10
ELEMENT PROPERTIES

PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 PAT318, Section 10, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-2

ELEMENT PROPERTY DEFINITION ELEMENT PROPERTY DEFINITION (CONT.)


● Properties associated with geometry will be re-applied to new mesh
after re-meshing
● Element Property form is used to specify: ● Element properties may vary in space as described by fields
● Element type and formulation ● e.g. thickness = 0.10*’Y + 0.20*’X**2
● Nastran lumped point mass, CONM2 ● Property forms are specific to application code, element type, and
● ABAQUS solid element standard formulation, C3D8 configuration
● Cross-section properties
● 0-D : lumped mass, mass matrix
● 1-D : A, Iyy, Izz, J
● 2-D : thickness, plate offset, material orientation
● 3-D : material, integration scheme
● Region of application
● Geometry
● FEM
● Region(s)

PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 PAT318, Section 10, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-4
ELEMENT PROPERTY CREATION PROPERTIES INPUT FORM
● Data templates are finite element solver,
● First, if necessary, select the desired analysis
code in Preferences/Analysis element type, and configuration specific
● Select the dimensionality of the element ● Materials may be selected by clicking the
● 0-D (Mass, Spring) Matl Prop Name icon, then selecting from
● 1-D (Beam) the choices in the Select Existing Material
● 2-D (Shell, 2D Solid) window
● 3-D (Solid)
● Specify a name (maximum 31 characters)
● Select element Options
● Enter properties in the Input Properties form
● The Select Application Region form is used the
same as that for LBCs

PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 PAT318, Section 10, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-6

PROPERTIES INPUT FORM (CONT.) PROPERTIES INPUT FORM (CONT.)

● Brackets around a data item


● If an appropriate Field name denote that the
exists, it can be selected, specification of the item is
e.g. select thickness2 for optional, e.g. [Nonstructural
Thickness. Mass] indicates Patran will
process the data in the
Input Properties form
without non-structural mass

PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 PAT318, Section 10, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-8
BEAM ELEMENT PROPERTIES BEAM ELEMENT PROPERTIES EXAMPLE (NASTRAN)
● Bar and Beam elements require a vector to define the
● Define a material property Y
orientation of the cross-section (the orientation of the
● Input the physical properties
element coordinates y and z) X
● Apply the physical properties to the Z
● In Patran, this vector is defined using either the Patran global X,Y,Z
model (i.e. Edge 2 of Surface 6)
(Coord 0) or a local coordinate system, e.g. Coord 3 Beam [Section Name]
● The cross-section moments I11 and I22, and the torsional Material “Aluminum” is
selected
cross-section moment J, not polar section moment, are Vector specifying beam
defined with respect to the element coordinate system. cross-section orientation;
< v1 v2 v3 Coord m >
● To recover bending stress, stress recovery points must be Beam is offset –1.5 in the
Patran global Y direction;
defined relative to the element coordinate system < v1 v2 v3 Coord n >
● Called C,D,E,F for Nastran Member pinned at one end
(local coordinate system)
● Used to determine “c” in the classical equation σ = Mc/I
Select here to use Beam
Library to calculate A, I11,
I22, and J. Otherwise, input
PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 A, I11, I22, and J manually.
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-10

BEAM LIBRARY DISPLAYING BEAM SECTIONS


● Optionally, beam sections can
be created, viewed, and stored
in the database ● Beam sections and offsets can be displayed by using
● A library of standard shapes is Display/Load/BC/Elem. Props…and choosing, for
available to automatically example, 3D:FullSpan+Offsets
calculate A, I11, I22, and J
● Beam Library is available from ● The actual cross-section
the Input Properties form of and orientation is
Element Properties, or under displayed as shown
Tools: Beam Library
● Only if the beam’s
● Beam sections assigned to cross-section is defined
elements can be graphically with Beam Library
viewed for each element
● If cross-section specified
● Cross-section properties can be X
Y
with Area, I 1,1, etc. use
Z
calculated for arbitrary shapes …+Equiv. I or A
PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 PAT318, Section 10, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-12
ARBITRARY BEAM SECTION PROPERTY SPECIFICATION USING FIELDS
● Variable Thickness Plate (t = 0.10 + 0.05 * X2 + 0.05 *
● A Beam section definition
Y3)
can be created for an
● Create the field
arbitrary shape
● Apply the field to the plate as input to the property
● The library of standard “thickness”
shapes is not used,
● Show scalar plot of the resulting thickness
instead, the dimensions of FRINGE PLOT Thickness
the cross-section are .59
.55
provided for the calculation .52
.48
of A, I11, I22, and J .44
.40
● Beam sections assigned .36
to elements can be .32
.29
graphically viewed for .25
.21
each element .17
.13
.096
PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 .058
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-14

MASS PROPERTIES

● Mass Properties application is


available under Tools for 2D
and 3D calculations
● Can be calculated for selected
groups, and can include
Geometry, FEM, or both
● Output includes mass, volume, center of
gravity, principal inertias at the center of
gravity, the radii of gyration corresponding
to the principal inertias at the center of gravity
● A user specific coordinate frame may be used
● Data can optionally be output to a text report file

PAT318, Section 10, September 2008 PAT318, Section 10, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S10-16
SECTION 11
ANALYSIS SETUP

PAT318, Section 11, September 2008 PAT318, Section 11, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-2

ANALYSIS SETUP SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS


● The comments below are specific to Nastran.
However, there are similar features for other
* solvers, e.g. Marc, Dytran, etc
● The analysis model may be prepared for:
● The Analysis forms are automatically set to ● Entire Model – the entire
correspond to the user-selected analysis code, model in the Patran
e.g. Nastran (*). database, regardless of
● Analysis parameters are specified using these what is posted to the
viewport, is submitted
forms.
● Selected Group – the
● Optionally, can submit and monitor the status of model in only the
the analysis job(s) across the network. specified group, e.g.
● Access the solver results file group_1, is submitted
● For Nastran, this form can also be used to read ● After selecting the
desired group click
an existing bulk data file into the Patran the Cancel button
database; Nastran files can also be read using
File: Import.
PAT318, Section 11, September 2008 PAT318, Section 11, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-4
SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS (CONT.) SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS (CONT.)
● The analysis model may be prepared for
● Job Name
(continued):
● Important tool in the Analysis form
● Existing deck – direct Patran to submit an existing
Nastran deck (file) for an analysis. Simply select the ● Serves several purposes
analysis Job Name. Also, can edit the analysis deck ● Prefix name of analysis deck (file), jobname.bdf, and
from within Patran. resulting analysis files generated by Nastran, i.e.
jobname.f04, jobname.f06.
● Restart – set-up a restart analysis deck (file) using an
● Name stores all the settings of the Analysis form used to
existing analysis Job Name and creating a new generate the job, going from Patran to Nastran
restart Job Name. This is only supported for SOL ● Can create a Job Description that “tags” along with Job
101, 103, and 106. Name in the Patran database for future reference
● Interactive – allows the set-up of a modal frequency ● Serves as a cross-reference link when importing results
response analysis using modes from a previously run between database stored subcase / load case names and
normal modes analysis. Loads and output requests result file subcase / load case names
may be defined, a fast restart performed, and results ● Be careful when deleting job names. All files generated
viewed. Can be used only if the model was created in using that job name (in the database directory) will also
Patran. be deleted.

PAT318, Section 11, September 2008 PAT318, Section 11, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-6

SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS (CONT.) SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS (CONT.)


● Select Solution Type… to specify the type of solver
analysis, e.g. nonlinear static: ● Direct text input (DTI) allows the insertion into the
Nastran input file that is created upon translation out
of Patran, of additional data that needs to be used to
define the model.

PAT318, Section 11, September 2008 PAT318, Section 11, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-8
SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS (CONT.) SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS (CONT.)
● Select the subcases already defined using
Subcase Select…
● Create subcases under
Subcases…
● In Patran a Subcase is the
combination of a Load Case,
Subcase Parameters,
Output Requests, DTI,
Superelement definitions,
and Selected Explicit MPCs

● The run-ready file can be submitted directly to


Nastran from within Patran, or the file can be
submitted outside of Patran
PAT318, Section 11, September 2008 PAT318, Section 11, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-10

SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS (CONT.) ACCESSING RESULTS IN PATRAN


● Subcase Output Requests ● Results can be accessed by Attach XDB, Read
● Two ways to specify Output Requests Output2, Attach MASTER, Attach T16/T19, or
Attach d3plot
● Output for single Subcase
● In general, either the results or model, or both can
be accessed
● Result Entities: stresses, displacements
● Model Data: nodes, elements
● Both: both model and results

PAT318, Section 11, September 2008 PAT318, Section 11, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-12
ACCESSING RESULTS IN PATRAN (CONT.) ACCESSING RESULTS IN PATRAN (CONT.)
● All options have 3 choices for what to import, except
● Patran does not read the results .XDB data file into the
for T16/T19 which has only results or model
database. It attaches the .XDB file which results in the storing of ● Results Entities -- attach/import only the results portion of the
only metadata (result case names and the .XDB file location) in file
the Patran database. After attaching the file, the .XDB file must ● Model Data -- import only enough of the FE model so the
be kept in the file system. MASTER and T16/T19 do the same results can be displayed on the FE entities
thing since they use a similar DRA (direct results access)
method to attach the files. ● Both -- attach/import results and skeleton portion of the FE
● OP2 import physically imports and stores the results in the model
Patran database. The OP2 file is not needed after import. ● Model Data (only model) characteristics
● .XDB attached results can be accessed more quickly from ● XDB -- imports grids, element topology, coordinate frames,
Patran than OP2 imported results. and superelement group information
● OP2 and T16/T19 -- imports grids, element topology, and
coordinate frames
● MASTER -- reuses the .bdf import capability
PAT318, Section 11, September 2008 PAT318, Section 11, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-14

ACCESSING RESULTS IN PATRAN (CONT.) READ NASTRAN INPUT FILE


● If a .XDB file gets changed (contents or time/date stamp) or gets
moved, and it is attached to an Patran database, it will be necessary
to delete the attachment and re-attach the file ● Existing Nastran bulk data files can be read
● Attach .XDB requires that the file be “seen” on the system. It can be into Patran to verify and update models that
either local or NFS mounted to the machine were not created inside Patran
● There is no limit to the number of .XDB files that can be attached to an ● The Nastran bulk data file reader is used to
Patran database, or to the number of users attaching to a single .XDB translate the model into Patran
file
● Any statement not recognized will be
● A Control File called <jobname>.jbr is created by the OP2 import or
the T16/T19 attachment. The File describes what translator and optionally displayed in a window by area, file
options were used, along with the file imported. management section, executive section,
● Failure indices can be imported into Patran via the OP2 file, but not case control section, or bulk data section
the .XDB file. ● Numbering offsets can be set to none,
● OP2 results file import is no longer being enhanced in Patran. Only automatic, or manually input for each entity
bug fixes and general maintenance is being done.
type
PAT318, Section 11, September 2008 PAT318, Section 11, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S11-16
SECTION 12
FIELDS

PAT318, Section 12, September 2008 PAT318, Section 12, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-2

FIELDS SPATIAL FIELD


● Spatial Field – variation of the field with respect to:
● Physical coordinate system coordinates, e.g. X,Y,Z
● Parametric coordinates, e.g. ξ1,ξ2
● Fields are used to define variation in: ● Analysis results

● Load/boundary conditions ● User-defined mix of allowable independent variables and


compiled PCL functions
● Material Properties
● Element Properties
● There are three types of fields:
● Spatial fields
● Material Property fields
● Non-spatial fields
CFD - Inlet Velocity Plate Thickness

PAT318, Section 12, September 2008 PAT318, Section 12, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-4
MATERIAL PROPERTY FIELD NON-SPATIAL FIELD
● Material Property field – variations of the field with ● Non-Spatial field – variation of the field with respect to:
respect to: ● Time, Frequency, Temperature, Displacement, and Velocity
● Temperature, Strain, Strain Rate, Time, and Frequency
● User-defined mix of allowable independent variables and
● User-defined mix of allowable independent variables and compiled PCL functions
compiled PCL functions
LEGEND
model

0.35

0.3

0.25

0.2

0.15

0.1

0.05

0
0 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 3.6 4.2 4.8

PAT318, Section 12, September 2008 PAT318, Section 12, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-6

SPATIAL FIELD EXAMPLE (SCALAR TYPE) SPATIAL FIELD EXAMPLE (VECTOR TYPE)

● Describe a variable thickness for a plate


model ● Inlet velocity fields can be easily defined
● Thickness varies
with the vector field option
● 0.2 at the leading edge (T = 0) ● Vector fields can be defined with respect
0.6
● 0.6 at the trailing edge (T = 1.57) to any reference coordinate system
● As a function of SIN, where Theta varies from 0
to 90 degrees
0.7
Thickness = 0.2 + 0.4*SINR(’T) Y
0.9
X
1.0 Flow
T=1.57 0.9
T
0.7
Z R T=0 0.2
PAT318, Section 12, September 2008 PAT318, Section 12, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-8
SPATIAL FIELD – TABULAR INPUT FEM FIELDS
● Tabular input
● Field data values can be entered into 1, 2, or ● Two types of FEM Fields are available:
3 dimensional spreadsheets ● Discrete FEM Fields define data associated to a list of nodes
or elements; no interpolation is performed
X pressure
0 0 psi
(*) ● Continuous FEM Fields are used to map data (interpolate)
1
2
10 psi
30 psi
from one analysis to another (thermal to structural) or from one
3 60 psi mesh to another (global to local analysis)
LEGEND

----- xy1
● Vector FEM Fields are created from displacements and
60
50 forces
40
30 ● Scalar FEM Fields are created from pressures and
20
temperatures
10
0
0 1 2 3

● Import/export-to (*) Excel spreadsheet


PAT318, Section 12, September 2008 into/out-of Patran spreadsheets PAT318, Section 12, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-10

CREATING A DISCRETE FEM FIELD CREATING A CONTINUOUS FEM FIELD


● Procedure to create continuous FEM
● Specify Discrete, Vector and Field
Node ● Display desired results on mesh,
e.g. temperature at nodes. Field is
● Select or type node IDs into created using the data that
Select a Node in Input Data corresponds to the display
form, then click Return ● Select Continuous for FEM Field
● Input vector data, e.g. <x y Definition, and select type of field,
e.g. Scalar for temperature
z>, for Values
● Select the group that has the results
● Can use this in Loads/BCs displayed on it. Make sure the
display matches the field type
selected
● Choose proper extrapolation option
● Do not delete mesh that was used to
create FEM field, e.g. thermal model
● Use the FEM field in creating a
Load/BC, e.g. structural thermal load
PAT318, Section 12, September 2008 PAT318, Section 12, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-12
MATERIAL PROPERTY FIELD – TABULAR INPUT SHOWING FIELD DATA
● Material Properties can be specified as a function of
Temperature, Strain, Strain Rate, Time, and
● Fields may be
Frequency
shown with an X-Y
● Example: tabular input of elastic modulus defined as a
function of temperature and strain Plot
● One independent
variable must be
selected
LEGEND
model

120

100

80

60

40

20

PAT318, Section 12, September 2008 PAT318, Section 12, September 2008
0
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S12-14 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
SECTION 13
LOADS & BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-2

LOADS & BOUNDARY CONDITIONS TYPES OF LOAD & BOUNDARY CONDITIONS


● Some of the Load and Boundary Conditions that are
● Loads and boundary conditions are analysis code specific supported:
● They can be applied to geometry or finite elements ● Displacement ● Outflow
● Loads and boundary conditions associated to geometry will be re- ● Initial velocity ● Contact
applied to new mesh after re-meshing the geometry, editing, etc.
● Inertial load ● Temperature
● Fields are used to define variations in loads or boundary ● Force ● Heat source
conditions ● Pressure ● Heat flux
● Can use imported results from previous analysis – FEM ● Distributed load ● Convection
field ● CID distributed load ● Radiation
● Total load ● Also, view factor
● Inflow

PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-4
STRUCTURAL LOADS & BOUNDARY CONDITIONS CREATING LOAD/BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
● Select the appropriate Load/BC from the
● Load and boundary Object option box (i.e. Pressure,
condition choices are Temperature, Inflow, …)
dependent upon the ● Select the Load Case applicable to this
specified analysis load/boundary condition
preference ● We recommend not using more than 31
characters for set names
● Enter Target Element Type if required (1-D,
2-D, or 3-D)
● Input the appropriate data on the Input Data
form
● Specify region (Application Region) to apply
the Load/BC to
PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-6

INPUT DATA SYNTAX APPLICATION REGION

● The correct syntax is shown above the databoxes ● Loads and boundary conditions
may be applied to Geometry, FEM,
or Region
● When selecting Geometry the
Application Region selection box
will look like

● Displacement boundary condition syntax


● Translation and rotation
Null = free degree-of-freedom
0 = fixed degree-of-freedom
Non-zero number = enforced δo or θo

Example: <0, ,0> : Ux = Uz = 0, Uy = free


PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-8
PRESSURE LOAD USING SPATIAL FIELD TIME DEPENDENT LOAD EXAMPLE
● Specify pressure load as -68.6 *COSR(‘T) in cylindrical
coordinate system 1
● Create the spatial field using coordinate system 1
● Specify the field in Load/Boundary Conditions Pressure

Time

● Create a time dependent


field
● Time dependent load case
must first be defined prior
to creating the load under
Loads/BCs

PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-10

SHOWING LOADS & BOUNDARY CONDITIONS


TIME DEPENDENT LOAD EXAMPLE (CONT.)
● Fringe plots of any Loads/BCs can be plotted such
● Create the load set as:
● The spatial and time dependence functions ● Temperatures
are multiplied
● Components of a vector
● The desired vector must be selected from the
Select Data Variable box
● The vectors must now be used to create a scalar
for plotting
● The plot can be applied to all of the groups in the
current viewport
● To display Loads/BCs set, applied to geometry, on
the FEM, first, activate “Show on FEM Only” toggle
in Display/Load/BC/El. Props form, then Plot
Markers in the Loads/BCs form
PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-12
SHOWING LOADS & BOUNDARY CONDITIONS (CONT.) DISPLAY OPTIONS
● Applied Loads/BCs become part of
the graphics display. Screen
● Created load and boundary conditions can be verified
refreshes and view changes will not
using: remove them.
● Marker plots showing created Loads/BCs icons ● Control of all or individual Loads/BCs
● Displacement
display is done through the
Display/Load/BC/El. Props form
● Rotation
● Allows color coding of Loads/BCs
● Displacement and rotation Markers
● Temperature 788.0 ● Evaluate load & boundary condition
● Force 100.0 sets applied to geometry on finite
elements by selecting Show on FEM
● Contour plots of any scalar data quantity (fringe and element fill) Only
● Display tables showing the Loads/BCs in a spreadsheet format ● Labeling and scaling of vectors are
adjusted in the Vectors/Filters section
PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-14

LOAD CASE CREATION LOAD CASE CREATION (CONT.)


● Load cases may be created prior to the
creation of load/boundary conditions
● Specify a load case name (not more than
31 characters)
● Current load case is what Loads/BCs are
assigned to
● Group multiple load/boundary conditions ● Select load case type
● Static, Time Dependent, or Combination ● To specify time dependent load/boundary
conditions, it is necessary to first create Time
● Priorities to add or overwrite load/boundary
Dependent load case
condition sets can be specified
● Resolving intersecting load/boundary
conditions is done under Input Data

PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-16
INPUTTING LOAD CASE DATA
● Select the desired load/boundary conditions in Select
Individual Loads/BCs section
● Specify the scale factor for each LBC by clicking in a cell
under Scale Factor, then input data in Scale Factor box
● Prioritize “intersecting”
load/boundary
conditions by clicking
in a cell under Priority,
then enter the priority
(e.g. 1) in the Priority
box

PAT318, Section 13, September 2008 PAT318, Section 13, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S13-18
SECTION 14
RESULTS

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-2

RESULTS POST-PROCESSING RESULTS POST-PROCESSING (CONT.)


 The results can be read through
 Standard translators, e.g. Analysis menu for Nastran preference
 PATRAN 2.5 .dis, .els, or .nod formats in File/Import/Results
 Read into database via PCL
 The Results post processing  Results from various analysis runs can be stored in the same
module can be used to
database under different result cases
process scalar, vector, and
tensor results into a variety  Static
of graphical display types
 Transient – each time step = 1 Result Case
 Results can come from many analysis types  Non-linear – each load increment = 1 Result Case
 Structural, thermal, CFD, electromagnetic
 Static or dynamic  More than one load case can be operated on simultaneously
 Results can be filtered based on attributes or numerical values
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-4
RESULTS POST-PROCESSING (CONT.) RESULTS MAIN FORM

 Procedure
 Set Action to Create and select
 Results can be displayed in type of plot (the Object)
any coordinate system  Select the Result Case(s) and
 Vector components in a the result type
local coordinate system  Apply to add the plot to the
display
 Plots can be animated by clicking
 New results may be derived by linearly combining existing
the Animate button(lower left)
results, using a user-defined PCL expression or PCL function,
when the plot is created
etc.
 Any plot can be saved in a file and retrieved for future use
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-6

QUICK PLOT DEFORMATION PLOT


● Results: Create/Quick Plot
● Results: Create/Deformation
● A combined, yet simplified, version of the
Deformation and Fringe tools ● The Deformation tool is specifically designed
to deal with displacement-type plots
● Designed so that as few as four clicks are
needed to create a combined ● Five icon menu options; unlike Quick Plot
Deformation/Fringe plot ● Select Results
● Four icon menu options ● Target Entities
● Select Results ● Display Attributes
● Fringe Attributes ● Plot Options
● Deform Attributes ● Animation Options
● Animation Options
● The Select Deformation Result listbox may
● Data manipulation (averaging, coordinate
include “non-displacement” type results
transformation, etc.) can only be changed
by editing the file settings.pcl variables because all vector type results are listed
● Changing settings means Quitting out of ● Can display either Component or Resultant
Patran, editing settings.pcl, and restarting ● Form settings may be saved to a “plot name”
Patran
in the database
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-8
FRINGE PLOT MARKER PLOT
● Results: Create/Fringe ● Results: Create/Marker/Vector
● Scalar, Vector, or Tensor plots
● The Fringe tool provides fringe display
● Displacements and constraint forces are
capabilities that are not provided in Quick vectors
Plot ● Element stresses/strains/forces are tensors
● GUI based results transformation, averaging ● A vector plot displays arrows to represent
options, display options the vectors
● Five Icon menu Options ● A tensor plot can be as detailed as a six
● Select Results (same as Quick Plot for component tensor cube
selection, position, and quantity; same as ● A scalar plot is simply a marker shape with
Deformation for the remainder) a number/value alongside of it
● Target Entities ● The alternative option is poor. Create a
● Display Attributes (same as Quick Plot) Fringe plot, not displaying the fringe colors,
but displaying the fringe value labels
● Plot Options
● Five icon menu choices
● Animation Options (same as Deformation)
● Select Results (same as Deformation)
● One of the more misunderstood tools in ● Target Entities
attempting to correlate Patran results to ● Display Attributes
Nastran results ● Plot Options (same as Fringe)
● May process multiple result cases ● Animation Options (same as Deformation)
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-10

CURSOR PLOT CONTOUR PLOT


● Results: Create/Contour/Lines
● Results: Create/Cursor/Scalar ● Generates “old style” contour line plots in
color or black & white
● Create a Scalar, Vector, or Tensor tool that
● Fringe post-processing rules apply for this
when activated, picked entities, e.g. tool
element, will have result value label shown ● Five options of this form are similar to those
at their location in the viewport of the other forms
● Three icon menu choices ● Select Results (Same as Deformation)
● Target Entities
● Select Results
● Display Attributes
● Display Attributes ● Plot Options (Same as Fringe)
● Plot Options ● Animation Options (Same as Deformation)

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-12
ISOSURFACE PLOT GRAPH: Y VS X
● Results: Create/Isosurface
● By Result Value ● Results: Create/Graph/Y vs X
● Create isosurfaces based on results ● A tool to plot results in X-Y plot format
● By Coordinate Value ● Plot Result vs Coordinate Axis, a defined
● Create planes of constant coordinate value, e.g. X = Path Length, or other Result
constant ● Four icon menu options
● Display fringe on the planes ● Select Results
● Fringe post-processing rules apply for this tool ● Target Entities
● Five options of this form are similar to those of the ● Display Attributes
other forms ● Plot Options (same as Fringe)
● Select Results (similar to Deformation) ● Graph created using an XYWindows plot
● Target Entities ● Additional Graph/Window control is not
● Display Attributes available in this tool. It can be managed
using the XY Plot application.
● Plot Options (similar to Fringe)
● Animation Options
(similar to Deformation)

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-14

ANIMATION REPORT
● Results: Create/Animation ● Results: Create/Report
● Facility to export and format results
● Stand-alone Animation tool for reports (file) from the Patran
existing results plots database
● Select result cases, results types,
● 2D or 3D Graphics, Preview, VRML, positions, quantities, and entities to
and MPEG are the same as the have in the report
● Four icon menu options
Animation Options tool for forms like ● Select Results
Deformation and Fringe ● Target Entities
● Display Attributes
● No icon menu options
● Plot Options (same as Fringe)
● Three methods
● Preview -- show report in UNIX
shell or DOS stdout window
● Overwrite File -- if file exists,
overwrite; if not, create new file
● Append File -- if file exists, append
to file; if not, create new file
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-16
FREEBODY PLOT CREATING & COMBINING RESULTS
● Results: Create/Freebody ● Results: Create/Results
● The freebody tool is used to create freebody ● Can create analysis results (within solver and
diagrams for loads or displacements engineering guidelines) without re-running the
● The tool is accessed under Results analysis
● Results: Create/Freebody ● Seven methods of results creation
● Under that there are three methods ● Combine – linear combination of result cases
● Loads – graphical vector display of freebody loads at
all perimeter nodes of the target entities ● Maximum – maximum values from selected
● Interface – causes the calculation of the total force and result cases
moment acting across a boundary (interface) at a point ● Minimum -- minimum values from selected
● Displacements – similar to loads except that result cases
displacements are displayed on the perimeter nodes
instead of loads ● Sum – sum the result cases
● Summation Point – forces and moments are ● Average – average the result cases
summed about the specified point/location, e.g. Point
4 ● PCL Function – create result from results using
● Transform Results – transform results using an
a PCL function
Patran local coordinate system, e.g. Coord 1 ● Demo -- facility to create sample/test results to
● Data must be available from Grid Point Force demonstrate the Results tools
Balance Table (GPFORCE=ALL)
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-18

QUICK PLOT FORM QUICK PLOT FORM (CONT.)


 Quick Plot result display form has been ● Result Quantities
designed to accommodate easy access to
● For Vector type results
basic post-processing feature such as
● Magnitude, X-Component, Y-Component, and Z-Component are available
 Fringe plots ● For Tensor type results
 Deformed plots ● Many types shown are not computed by the analysis code
 Combined fringe and deformation plots ● Patran can use imported tensor data to calculate result quantities that are not
generated by the analysis code
 Quick animation ● Patran online help describes the computed Quantity derivations in great detail
 Simple Deformed, Fringe, or combination -- Using Patran, results_postprocessing, Numerical Methods, Derivations
plots can be created and animated with very ● Engineering vs True (tensor) strain results
few menu selections ● Tensor Result Quantities
● X, Y, and Z Component
 Select Result Case(s) ● XY, YZ, and ZX Component vs XY, YZ and ZX Engr. Component

 Select Fringe Result ● Patran translators convert engineering strain values to scientific (True (tensor))
strain values by dividing the shear strain components by 2, e.g. εxy = γxy/2
 Select Deformation Result ● Analysis codes such as Nastran and ABAQUS calculate engineering strain values
● Patran does this conversion (True (tensor)) to calculate other result components and to transform
 Click on Animate (if desired) results into other coordinate systems

 Apply
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-20
QUICK PLOT FORM (CONT.) QUICK PLOT FORM (CONT.)
● Fringe Attributes
● Position sub form ● Controls the display of Fringe plots
● Select and Filter Positions on elements to be ● Easy access to Spectrum and Range controls
displayed ● Control Fringe Style
● Several types ● Discrete/Smooth, Continuous, Discrete/Flat are all
● Non-Layered (2D and 3D Solids)
targeted towards nodal type fringe plots
● Element Fill is targeted towards Centroidal fringe plots
● Z1 / Z2 (2D shell elements)
(“checker board” pattern)
● Layer i; i=1 to maximum number of plies (laminate
● Fringe overlaid onto elements can be shrunk using Shrink
shells)
Factor
● Center C, D, E, F (bars/beams)
● Great in combination with Show Fringe Label
● One or more positions may be selected for Quick Plot checkbox when wanting to display fringe values
● For Quick Plot, multiple positions can be selected for without colors, especially when comparing results to
one or more Result Cases since only one Result Case is Nastran .f06 file
processed at a time ● Element edge color and display of element edges can be
● For other Results tools (e.g. Fringe), if multiple Result altered
Cases are selected only one position may be selected ● Edit title content using Title Editor
since these tools will process multiple Result Cases into
● Option to display Max/Min labels on plot
one picture
● Change Label Style for Fringe plot
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-22

QUICK PLOT FORM (CONT.) QUICK PLOT FORM (CONT.)


● Deform Attributes ● Animation Options
● Provides ability to modify the display of a deformed ● Choose to Animate Fringe and/or Deformation plots. They
results plot are available when a single Result Case is selected.
● Deformation shading controlled by Render Style of ● Constant Range value option available when multiple
Result Cases are selected
this form (not toolbar shading icons)
● Two Animation Methods. This is for a single Result Case
● Model scale only.
● Model Scale is defined as the maximum length of the ● Modal -- Animate from –1x to +1x the displayed result values
● Ramped -- Animate from 0x to +1x the displayed result values
model’s bounding box in the current viewport,
multiplied by the Scale Factor specified in the form. ● Animation Graphics control
● 2D -- Animate without the ability to change view of the model
The resulting value is the Scale Factor applied to the ● 3D -- Animate with the ability to change view of the model
deformations to be displayed ● Preview -- shows only 1 cycle of the Animation
● True Scale is always recommended for non-linear ● VRML -- generate a VRML file format of the Animation. This is for a
single Result Case only.
analyses and scale factor type plots (e.g. 100x ● MPEG -- generate an MPEG-1 recording of the displayed Animation.
displacements shown) Suggest using default window size to get a manageable MPEG file. This
is for a single Result Case only.
● Option whether or not to display Undeformed shape ● Select the number of frames to display for the Animation
● Control color of Undeformed model in this form as ● Must use the Animate checkbox of the Select Results form
well icon to initiate the Animation
● Result title and label styles of plot may be adjusted
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-24
QUICK PLOT ANIMATION FORM RESULTS POST-PROCESSING PROCEDURE
 Deformed Shape (static or modal) and/or  Set Action to Create
fringe animation can be performed
 Select the plot type (Object), i.e. Deformation,
 The defaults are to animate both fringes Fringe, Marker, etc.
and deformation with the modal method in
2D, 8 frames  Select the Result Case(s), i.e. static, modal,
 These selections can be changed using transient, etc.
the Animation Options form  Select the result type, i.e. deformation, stress,
 Modal animation creates frames by strain, etc.
multiplying the results from –1.0 to +1.0;
Ramped goes from 0 to +1.0  Select the position, e.g. layer in shell
 2D uses in plane animation; 3D permits  Select the Quantity, i.e. Min. Principal,
the rotation of the model, using the
middle mouse button, while the model is Component, etc.
still animating  Show as Component, i.e. XX, YY, Y+Z
 The more frames specified the more
continuous the animation, but the more  Animate
computer resources are needed
 Modify Target Entities, Display Attributes, Plot and
Animation Options as desired using the five icons
at the top of the form
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-26

SELECT RESULT CASE(S) SELECT RESULT CASE(S) (CONT.)


 If multiple result cases are in the
database one or more of them can be  Filter Results Case(s)
selected from the Select Result Case(s)
 When in compressed format it is necessary to
list using the mouse enter the filter form to select Result Cases Select
View
Subcases
 Click on one to select it Subcases  Click on Select Subcases
 Select a continuously listed set using  Setup one or more filters using Filter Method
click and drag  Depending on the analysis type; i.e. modal,
 Select a discontinuous set by Ctrl- transient; Filter Method variables may
change
clicking
 Global Variable, e.g. time
 If desired, filter using View Subcases,  Character String -- text within Result Case
names; may use wildcards
then Select Subcases for search.
 Two icons appear when there are multiple  Subcase Ids -- filter by ID or range of IDs
Result Cases using the same prefix View
 All -- select all Result Cases
Subcases Select Filter button to see the resulting list for
 View Subcases (Compress/Expand toggle 
icon) Select Selected Result Case(s)
Subcases
 Select Subcases filter icon  Click Apply if the list is what is wanted
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-28
RESULT POSITION, QUANTITY AND SHOW AS TARGET ENTITIES FORM
Target Entities
 Position (ply/layer) selection for beam  Results in the Select Result icon
or plate layered results Case(s) can be plotted for
 A particular result value component or targeted entities based on
derived quantity can be selected from
Quantity or Show As menu  Current Viewport – all entities
currently posted
 A set of Elements or Nodes –
a subset of the set of all
entities
 Groups – select entities by
group
 Materials, Properties, or
Element types – select
entities by material, etc.
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-30

TARGET ENTITIES FORM (CONT.) DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES FORM


 Depending on the plot type,
additional display controls include  Display Attributes form will
 Nodes change to match the plot type
 Elements and results entity selected
Display
 Faces/Free Faces  Parameters are filtered such Attributes
 Edges/Free Edges that only those appropriate icon
 Corners for the currently selected plot
 Element Centroids type are displayed
 Element Nodes
 Element All Data
 Remember that lists can also be
created and used with groups to
act as user-defined filters (e.g.
elements with
10,000<von Mises stress<20,000)
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-32
PLOT OPTIONS FORM PLOT OPTIONS FORM (CONT.)
 Coordinate system transformation options
 The Plot Options form is used to for scalar results
control the following:  As Is – no transformation. Results in solver
 Coordinate Transformation, e.g. coordinate system(s).
transform stress components  CID – Patran local coordinate system, e.g. Coord
3
 Scale Factor – multiply the results
by a factor  Projected CID – coordinate system projected onto
element, e.g. Coord 2.1
 Filter Values – filter results  Global – Patran global coordinate system, Coord
displayed using result values 0
 Averaging Domain and Method –  Default – projection of Patran global coordinate
how element results are combined system onto element
 Extrapolation method – how results  Material – element coordinate systems based on a
are combined in an element material definition and angle. Only for quad and tri
topology.
 Use a PCL Expression
 Element IJK – Patran defined element coordinate
 Re-loading of an existing plot systems. These can be different from solver
element coordinate systems.
 Saving current plot for future use
 Patran user manual provides detailed
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 information on transformations
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-34

COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION EXAMPLES FRINGE: PLOT OPTIONS


● Within Plot Options, it is possible to
Filter what Values are shown on a
σxx
σyy Fringe plot
σyy
σxx ● None -- no value filtering is applied
● Minimum -- values below this setting will not
be displayed
CID, Select Coordinate Frame Coord 1 Projected CID, Select CF Axis Coord 1.2,
o
● Maximum -- values above this setting will not
changing axis changes σxx direction by 90
be displayed
● Range -- only show values between the
min/max settings defined for this range
● Exclude -- show all displayed values except
σxx
σxx
those within this min/max range
Coord 0 ● Entities falling outside the Filter
parameter values are shown with a
black fill (for black backgrounds)
Global – uses Patran Coord 0 Element IJK – uses first two element nodes for σxx
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-35 direction Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-36
FRINGE: PLOT OPTIONS (CONT.) FRINGE: PLOT OPTIONS (CONT.)
● Averaging Definition provides different
options to determine the result values ● Domain (cont.) Elm 1 Elm 2
Elm 1 Elm 2
at nodes (*) shared by adjacent
elements. The dots (red) represent *
*
element results at the node (*),
not at element Gauss points. Elm 4 Elm 3
Elm 4 Elm 3

● Domain
● All Entities -- all result values at a node (from all ● Target Entities – average the result values at a node,
elements using that node (*)) are averaged producing a where the values correspond to elements that have
single value: n been selected under the Target Entities form of the
σ Node = (∑ σ Element i ) / n Create/Fringe form
i =1
● Element Type -- average the result values at a node,
● Material – average the result values at a node, where the where the values correspond to elements of the same
values corresponds to elements that have the same type, e.g. Quad4
material property ● None -- no averaging at nodes
● Property – average the result values at a node, where
the values corresponds to elements that have the same
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
element property set PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-38

FRINGE: PLOT OPTIONS (CONT.) FRINGE: PLOT OPTIONS (CONT.)


● Method  Extrapolation of element results to the element’s nodes
● When both deriving and averaging of a result invariant, can be done as follows
e.g. von Mises stress from the stress tensor, are to be  Shape Fn. -- result value at the element’s nodes is
performed the user has the following options: determined from fitting an extrapolating surface through the
● Derive/Average -- calculates the result invariant (Derive) known element result values
at the integration points, extrapolates the result invariant
to the element nodes, for all the elements, then causes  Average -- result is averaged within the element, then the
plotting the average (Average) for the contribution of each value from averaging is assigned to the element’s nodes:
element to each node m
● Average/Derive -- extrapolates the component values to σ Elementi Node = (∑σ Element
j
i)/ m
the element nodes, averages (Average) them, then j =1
calculates the result invariant (Derive) using the average  Centroid -- the centroidal value from the extrapolation
nodal component values surface is used at the element’s nodes
● Difference – causes plotting the absolute value of the  Min -- the smallest of the integration point values is used
difference between the largest and smallest of the values
at a node. The plot is sometimes called a Stress Jump  If the only result is at the centroid, the minimum
Plot when plotting stress. It is a quality check method. value is set equal to the centroidal value
Must use Domain option other than None to make this
work properly.  Max -- the largest of the integration point values is used
● Sum – causes plotting the sum of all values at an  If the only result is at the centroid, the maximum
element node value is set equal to the centroidal value
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-40
COMMENTS ON AVERAGING MARKER PLOT: SCALAR, VECTOR OR TENSOR
● There are positives and negatives about averaging:
● Positives ● Use the Results:
● Great way to determine if the mesh has enough density to predict the Create/Marker form
results accurately. If the results from averaging appear to be the same
● Scalar
as those from not averaging, then the mesh is considered adequate.
● “Smoothes” peaking results or results approaching a singularity ● Vector
● Negatives ● Tensor
● “Blind” averaging can hide peak results
● Never average:
● Across different material boundaries
● Across different thicknesses
● Across elements with different coordinate systems
● Across elements not in the same plane
● Amongst different element types

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-42

MARKER PLOT: SCALAR, VECTOR OR TENSOR MARKER RESULTANTS AND COMPONENTS


(CONT.)
● Scalar, Vector or Tensor plots
● Temperature is a scalar ● Display Marker/Vector Components in plots
● Displacements and Constraint Forces are ● Combined Components
vectors ● Resultant of two or three Components
● Element stresses/strains/forces are tensors ● Normally used to determine resultant shear within
● A scalar plot is simply a set of markers, a plane
e.g. sphere, with a number/value ● Set Show As: to Component
alongside it ● Select individual Components XX, YY, ZZ
● This eliminates the need of doing a Fringe ● Select sub-resultant X+Y, Y+Z, Z+X, or even
plot, turning off the fringe colors, and complete resultant X+Y+Z
displaying the fringe value labels
● A vector plot is an arrow plot
● A tensor plot can be as detailed as a six
component tensor cube
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-44
TEXT REPORT WRITER TEXT REPORT WRITER (CONT.)
 Writes out requested results information to the Patran parent window
(preview option) or to a file  Report type Method are Preview,
 Report type options: Overwrite File, and Append File
 Full – results and all related information  Available data includes
 Summary – max/min and associated Nodes or Elements
 Loadcase, subcase, and layer ID
 Data only
 Results, Target Entities and Plot Options are very similar to those of  X, Y, Z location of integration point or
other Plot Types node
 Stress components
 Stress invariants
 Magnitude of deformation
 X, Y, Z components of deformation
 Result CID
 Material name and ID
 Property name and ID
 Analysis CID of node
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-46

EXAMPLE FREEBODY PLOTS TEXT REPORT WRITER (CONT.)


235.00

126.25

447.52
 Display Attributes form
981.00  Format
1089.75
 Report format and column
1447.52
ordering can be adjusted to
the users needs
External Loads Reaction Forces  Page title, header and footer
can be specified
 Real and integer number
151.30 513.59
405.13
format can be specified
648.83 170.13
513.59

648.83

386.30

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008


Internal Section Loads PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-47 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-48
CREATE RESULTS FORM CREATE RESULTS FORM (CONT.)
 The Create/Results form is used to  PCL Function for user defined
select, manipulate, and combine expression
results  Independent Variables that are
 Create derived results based on available are dependent on type of
using the following operations for results being used, i.e. Nodal Scalar
has $SCALAR, Nodal Tensor has
the specified set of results $XX, $YY, etc.
 Combine – linear combination of  Can use standard arithmetic
set members operators (e.g. +) and Intrinsic
 Maximum – new result case with Functions (e.g. SIND)
maximum from set of results  Input desired PCL Expression, e.g.
 Minimum – minimum from set of SQRT($XX**2 + $YY**2) This
results represents (σxx2 + σyy2)1/2 for tensor
Specify results
 Sum – sum results in result set set of
results  Only one result case allowed. Use
 Average – average results in PCL expression for multiple result
result set cases by using
Utilities/Results/Result Toolbox.
 Demo – create dummy result case
for existing mesh
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-49 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-50

DISPLAY FRINGE PLOT INSIDE SOLID MODEL RESULTS IN MULTIPLE VIEWPORTS

 Show results color fringe


for interior of 3D model
 Create a clipping plane, e.g.
Viewing/Arbitrary Clipping
 Create a fringe plot using
Results, including Target
Entities/Addtl. Display
Control/Faces

Fringe Plot of Von Mises Stress Values Wireframe Deformed Shape


 Or better, can use Insight;
create a fringe plot on
planes of constant  Same model in both viewports, but displays created using
coordinate value different groups
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-51 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-52
SPECTRUMS AND RANGES CREATING SPECTRUMS AND RANGES
● Spectrums and Ranges are used to create fringe plots ● Can create spectrums or ranges in several places in
● Also, they are used for some marker plots Patran
● It is possible to create custom Spectrums and Ranges for these
types of plots
● Spectrums and Ranges are saved to the Patran database. These
can be used in a template database.
● How can this be done effectively?

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-53 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-54

CREATE SPECTRUM CREATING A RANGE


 To create a new range
use Results:
● The Spectrums form is divided into three Create/Fringe/
Display Attributes/
regions Range/Define Range,
● Current Spectrum or use Display: Ranges
● Create/Rename/Delete Spectrum in the Patran main
● Spectrum Attributes menu
● Select colors
● Click Apply to create the Spectrum

● After creating a Spectrum, to use it, it is


necessary to create a Fringe or Marker
plot.

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-55 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-56
CREATING A RANGE (CONT.) CREATING A RANGE (CONT.)
 Under Ranges several  Calculate Range
Actions can be under Data Methods
performed, e.g. Create (continued)
 Existing Ranges can  Enter the Number
be used if desired; if of Sub-ranges,
not, enter a new name click Fit Results,
then select posted
under New Range
or un-posted plot
Name
 Calculate Range under
Data Methods  Click Calculate to
calculate the
 The method of Range, and enter
calculating the the values into the
Range is specified spreadsheet
under Algorithms
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-57 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-58

RANGE ALGORITHMS RANGE THRESHOLDS


● Auto
● Thresholds are used to manually
● Allows the specification of Start Value (upper
end of Range) and End Value (lower end of Range) specify the size of the upper and lower
● Difference between any two adjacent values is constant Sub-range. The intermediate Sub-
● Delta ranges are created using the Data
● Specify the Start Value (upper end of Range) and a Methods Algorithm selected, e.g. Auto.
value to increment or decrement by (Delta) (e.g. start
@10000 and increment by –500 to obtain a range of 10000, 9500, etc.) ● After defining Thresholds Sub-ranges,
● Cluster click Apply
● Data is D1 < D2 < D3 < … < Dn
● Manual
● Define Sub-ranges by entering data into the cells in the Values column of
the Ranges spreadsheet
● Delta Log
● The (upper) end value of a Sub-range is equal to it’s (lower) end value
times (x) 10 to the power of Delta Log
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-59 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-60
RANGE THRESHOLDS (CONT.) RANGE ATTRIBUTES
● Allow Overwrite
● Lower
● If unselected this option will not allow the range’s
● Specify a Range value just above the definition to be modified when attributes of a tool
minimum value of the Range that uses it are changed. This is to prevent
● All values above this value will be equally accidental overwriting of the range by an auto-
spaced to the value on the top of the Range range result plot.

● Upper ● Force Result Update


● When selected it allows the range definition to be
● Specify a Range value just below the modified if the results value associated to a plot
maximum value of the Range that uses the range is changed. It causes the sub-
● All values below this value will be equally range intervals to be recalculated every time the
spaced to the value at the bottom of the range is used. It does not work in conjunction with
Range Data Methods/Algorithms Manual.
● Use Percentages ● Post When Used
● This option causes the range to be posted to a
● Specify Lower and Upper as result values
Lower @ Upper @ viewport if a Results tool that is posted to the
30,000 50,000 same viewport references it.
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-61 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-62

RANGE LABELS RANGE CONTROL FORM

● Selections for Label, etc. ● Appears only when select


Range… from any Fringe or
Marker plot form using Display
Attributes/Range…

● Control whether the values for


the Range are overwritten for
each new plot

● Control posting a range to a


given viewport

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-63 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-64
XY PLOT XY PLOT TERMINOLOGY
Legend
Analysis versus Test
Test Data
temp_vs_time
Load Case 4
Titles
0. 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 9.00
27.0

Temperature (C)
22.5 Versus
 Manages appearance of XY windows Time (sec)
18.0 Grid Line
 Manages display of curves in XY windows
Y Axis 13.5
 Fully integrated with results, loads,
9.00
properties, and material data Primary
Tick Mark
4.50
Node 6 Secondary
0. Tick Mark
0. 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 9.00

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-65 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation X Axis S14-66

CURVE DATA FROM FILE SCALE AND RANGE


 Read contents of (x,y) data pair text file into Patran using
XY Plot
 Scale
 XY Plot: Create/Curve, Curve Data Input
 Linear
Contents of file “file_1.xyd” Curve name
File Format  Semi-Log
XY DATA XYDATA, beautiful_curve
If XY pairs -3. -2.8
-2.3 -2.
 Log-Log
-2.099999 -1.3
-1.7 -0.30000001
-1.6 0.660000003
Data set 1
 Range
-1.3 1.3
-0.899998 2.2
-2.330001 2.7
 Controls method used to determine
0. 1.7
0.3300001 0.4000001
start and end points for the X and Y
YDATA
If Y only
YDATA, new_curve
100.
axes
(X initial 100.
and Xdelta 300.
will be 300.
specified 500. Data set 2
under curve 500.
data 400.
attributes) 300.
200.
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
0.
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-67 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-68
TITLES MODIFY DISPLAY PARAMETERS
 Virtually anything you see on the screen can be modified
LEGEND
quadratic_load  XY Window: border,
Analysis versus Test background, color
Test Data
Load Case 4 temp_vs_time
 Curve: line style, name,
Load Case 4
20.0
0. 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 9.00 data, symbols, color,
27.0
0.
Temperature (C)
thickness, curve fit method
22.5 Versus
-20.0 Time (sec)  Legend: on/off, location, border,
18.0 text, background, color
-40.0
13.5
 Axis: line style, scale, label
-60.0 9.00 formats, titles, tick
% distance from marks, grid lines
-80.0 left of window 4.50
Node 6  Plot Titles: location, size,
% distance from 0.
-100.
-1.05-.700-.350 0. .350 .700 1.05 top of window
0. 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 9.00 color, post/unpost

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-69 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-70

MODIFY XY WINDOW MODIFY CURVE


 Available symbol types
● Dot ● Square ● Fill Diamond
● Circle ● Fill Square ● Arrowhead
● Fill Circle ● Triangle ● Fill Arrowhead
LEGEND Border ● X ● Fill Triangle ● Hexagon
Variable_load
● Plus ● Diamond ● Fill Hexagon
20.0
Background
0.
LEGEND
Variable_load
-20.0 20.0

-40.0 0.

-20.0
-60.0
-40.0

-80.0
-60.0

-100. -80.0
-1.20 -.800 -.400 0. .400 .800 1.20
-100.
-1.20 -.800 -.400 0. .400 .800 1.20

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-71 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-72
RESULTS ANIMATION TYPICAL RESULTS ANIMATION
● Modal and transient animation can be
performed in Results
● Transient animation can be performed
with respect to any global variable, such
as time, load case, or frequency
Frame 1 Frame 7
● All posted tools will be displayed during
an animation, but only the tools with
animation enabled will change from
frame to frame
● Animation controls appear automatically
when a plot is animated

Frame 13 Frame 20
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-73 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-74

QUICK PLOT ANIMATION ANIMATION CONTROL SETUP


● So far we have discussed setting up and
● To perform a simple modal controlling Quick Plot animation of a
animation, select Action: Create, single Results Case
Object: Quick Plot
● Animation sequences pertaining to Animation
● Select the desired fringe and/or global variables (e.g. transient Options
Button
vector result animation) and modal analysis can be
performed in greater detail by clicking
● Click on and click Apply to
the Animation Options button when the
create the animation frames
plot is created

PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-75 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-76
ANIMATION OPTIONS FORM ANIMATION CONTROL
● When creating a plot, clicking the Animate button
● Once the animation has stared, you can
sets the Animate Method pull-down menu on the
pause and change the animation attributes
Animation Options form to a value, e.g. Global
Variable ● Animation Sequence:
● Animate Method: ● Cycle: animation cycles in a circular
manner (frame
● Global Variable – allows the animation of a tool with 1,2,…,max,1,2,…,max, etc.)
respect to any global variable (only available when
more than one Results Cases have been selected)
● Bounce: animation cycles from max to
min (frame 1,2,…,max,max-1,
● Modal – applies a sine function (-1 < sine < 1) to the etc.)
tool’s response
● Once the animation is paused, it can be
● Ramp – allows animation of a tool’s response by advanced forward one frame at a time and
multiplying the response by a range of scale factors the start/end frames may be changed
from 0 to 1
● To terminate the animation tool, select the
Stop Animation button
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-77 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-78

SETTING UP NON QUICK PLOT ANIMATION


● Procedure for setting up an animation
● In the Select Results form ● In the Animation Options form
Set Action to Create
1 an Object to the Set Animation
desired plot type Method to Global
Variable
4 Select 5
Animation Select global
Options button 6
variable, e.g.
Time
Select a set of
2 Result Case(s)
and a result type

Select the
number of
Click on
frames 7
3 Animate
Click Apply 8
PAT318, Section 14, September 2008 PAT318, Section 14, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-79 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S14-80
SECTION 15
FILE MANAGEMENT

PAT318, Section 15, September 2008 PAT318, Section 15, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-2

REVERTING YOUR DATABASE REBUILDING A DATABASE FROM JOURNAL FILE

● Reverting to the original database allows you


to eliminate the changes you have made in
the current modeling session
● Reverting to original database occurs if
“revert_enabled” is set to “TRUE” in the ● Run Patran, but do not open a database
setting.pcl file ● Select Rebuild from File/Utilities
● Edit file manually
● Select a journal file of choice
● Or, set Enable Revert Operation to on, then
close the database ● Click Apply
PAT318, Section 15, September 2008 PAT318, Section 15, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-4
PRINTING CREATING IMAGES
● Choice of printing single or multiple viewports
● Choice of creating a variety of types of
or XY windows on a single page or multiple
pages graphic files for viewport or XY window
● Supported drivers: CGM, HPGL, HPGL/2,
● Supported file formats: BMP, JPEG,
Patran Hard, PS, EPS
MPEG, PNG, TIFF, VRML

PAT318, Section 15, September 2008 PAT318, Section 15, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-6

CUSTOMIZATION FILES ADVANCED STARTUP FILES


Name Edit Location Comments
● For Unix OS, add printers by editing the p3_printers.def file settings.pcl ASCII edit with System Editor Working directories, home, or
p3_home
Settings for Patran variables (hardware or
software imaging, automatic refresh of
viewports, plotter parameters, options for
● p3_printers.def file is located in the $p3_home directory, e.g. warning messages, etc.)

/msc/patran2002 p3prolog.pcl ASCII edit with System Editor Working directories, home, or PCL files read at Patran start-up are used to
P3midilog.pcl p3_home pre-define PCL variables, precompile PCL
functions, and create user-defined or
● Customize printer options by copying the p3_printers.def file p3epilog.pcl
customized widgets

to your local or home directory template.db Binary edit within Patran p3_home (default) A “pristine” database that is copied when a
new database is created. Can be preloaded
● The Patran search path is .,~, $p3_home with desired settings, selections, data, etc.

● p3 toolbar.def and p3quickpick.def files are available to base.db Binary edit within Patran P3_home Identical to template.db, but database
contains no analysis preferences. Many
times, this database is used to make a
customize the toolbar (add icons) and quickpick pulldown template database with a reduced set of
analysis preferences.
menu, respectively.

PAT318, Section 15, September 2008 PAT318, Section 15, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-8
DATABASE TEMPLATES
● Can change which template is copied to the new database
● By default, Patran looks in the p3_home directory folder

Select Change Template Allows the selection of a different


button template database, e.g. base.db
PAT318, Section 15, September 2008 PAT318, Section 15, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S15-10
SECTION 16
STRESS-LIFE (S-N) METHOD

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-2

STRESS-LIFE (S-N) THEORY ASSUMPTIONS AND DEFINITIONS


● The S-N approach estimates total life without
distinguishing crack initiation from crack propagation ● Deformation can be separated between
an elastic (fully recoverable) and plastic
● It usually requires that the test data relate to the (permanent) component
geometry of the structure under assessment (structure ● The Stress Range is the algebraic
S-N curves) difference between maximum and
● Material S-N curves can also be generated from smooth minimum stress in a cycle
specimen test data; they are subsequently modified to ● The Stress Amplitude is half of the
reflect the effects of notches, surface conditions, etc. of Range
the real structure

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-4
S-N ANALYSIS
● Input is cycles of STRESS
● Also known as “High Cycle Fatigue” or “Nominal Stress
Approach”
● Nominal stress cycles must be elastic (hence high cycle)
though local stresses at the critical location will be plastic
● In MSC Fatigue S-N analysis, elastic FE results are used
directly (no plasticity correction) S-N CURVE
Actual Stress at Critical location

Measured nominal stresses

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-6

EARLY FATIGUE TESTING EARLY S-N CURVES


Stress Amplitude

Unnotched Shaft

Notched Shaft

Log (fatigue life)

Wohler’s Railway Component Test Rig Some of Wohler’s data for rotating bending tests
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
(1852 to 1870) PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-8
S-N APPROACH USES OF S-N APPROACH
● The S-N approach uses the (assumed elastic) nominal The uses of the S-N approach include:
stress range (S) as a measure of the severity of fatigue ● Establishing a well defined fatigue curve for the
loading purposes of design
● Life to failure (two pieces) is recorded in experiments ● Determination of a fatigue strength at a specified life
● Tests at several levels of stress range characterise the ● Demonstration of improved fatigue resistance from a
S-N curve material or surface treatment
● Such a curve can be derived for smooth specimens, for ● Acceptance of material for manufacturing purposes
individual components, for sub-assemblies, or for ● Answering questions posed by a service failure
complete structures

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-10

FATIGUE LIMIT MATERIAL S-N CURVES


● Steels tested with constant amplitude loading normally
exhibit a fatigue limit - a stress below which no fatigue Log(Stress)
damage appears to occur.
● The fatigue limit is associated with the difficulty a crack
has in getting past the first grain boundary, or dominant
microstructural barrier. It can be reduced or eliminated
Steel or Ti
after e.g. a few large loads, or in corrosive environment,
etc.
● Aluminum alloys do not seem to exhibit no such limit
Al alloy
or steel in seawater
Log(Life)

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-12
SCATTER IN S-N CURVES THE ANALYTICAL S-N CURVE
● Due to the statistical nature of the test, any given S-N The S-N curve can be expressed by the power law:
curve is associated with a certain probability of failure N*Sm=const
Static Limitations
● More insight on the S-N relationship can be obtained

e (∆ σ) log scale
representing scatter bands (e.g +/- 3 Standard errors)
1
together with the mean curve (50% Certainty of Survival)
m1 m2=0 identifies “Se” as
the fatigue limit
( ∆σ)

Stress ran ge
1
m2

1
7 8
1 10 5x10 If m2>0, a conventional
Endurance N (cycles) - log scale fatigue limit could be set
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
at N=5E8
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-14

THE ANALYTICAL S-N CURVE IN MSC FATIGUE


THE ANALYTICAL S-N CURVE IN MSC FATIGUE*
(CONT.)
● For the S-N curve, MSC Fatigue uses a variation on the
conventional power law ( N*Sm=const) :
S=SRI1*Nb (Note: m=-1/b)
● Two straight line can be defined through the b1 and b2 fatigue
strength exponents (see next image)
S=SRI1*Nb
b1
(with m=-1/b)
1
1
m1

*MSC Fatigue also gives an option to provide a family of curves by


points with the multi mean fatigue curve option
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-16
COMPONENT S-N CURVES REMOTE NOMINAL STRESS IN COMPONENT S-N
● For some components or features, especially structural
joints such as welds, there are so many things modifying
the behaviour of the base material that there is little point
in applying corrections to a material S-N curve
● In cases like this it is best to use a nominal stress-life
Nominal Stress P
_ A
curve which applies particularly to that component or A
feature, hence the definition of component S-N curve

P
P

CLASS F WELD DETAIL (BS7608)


PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-18

EXAMPLE OF COMPONENT CURVE: BS7608 WELD S-N METHOD – SIMILITUDE

Static Limitations
e ( σ 0 ) log scale

constant amplitude loading


1 in clean air
Effective curve obtained under variable amplitude
m
loading, equivalent to changing slope of sr - N curve
σ nom
above N = 10
( σ0 )
Stress ran ge

1
m+2

1 σ nom
7
1 10
The life of this . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is the same as the life of this . . . . .
Endurance N (cycles) - log scale
if both are subject to the same nominal stress
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-20
S-N METHOD – SIMILITUDE (CONT.) WORKSHOP
● The S-N method assumes that the life of a
component or structure is the same as that of a
laboratory test specimen if both are subject to the
same nominal stresses.
● Perform “Workshop 2: A Simple S-N Analysis”
● If the conditions in the test are different to those in
from MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide
the structure, similitude breaks down, and we need
to make corrections for factors such as mean stress, ● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you
environment, surface finish, etc. don’t understand

“The fine art of the fatigue expert is the struggle to


justify and force a similitude assumption between
experimental data and real life scenarios”
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-22

CASE STUDY: S-N ANALYSIS OF A KEYHOLE FEA MODEL OF THE HALF KEYHOLE

Fully Reversed Loading

Symmetric BC.
P = 10,000 N
Symmetric Half Model
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-24
LOADING INFO SETUP LOADING INFO SETUP (CONT.)

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-26

PLOT SIMPLE LOADING SELECT THE CREATED LOADING

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-28
MATERIAL INFO SETUP DISPLAY LIFE CONTOURS

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-30

MINER’S RULE – BLOCK LOADING


Miner’s rule assigns a “damage” of 1/Nf to each
cycle where Nf is the number of cycles to failure at
that load level (determined from an S-N curve)

Failure is predicted to
VARIABLE AMPLITUDE LOADS: occur when the total
damage reaches a
MINER’S RULE & RAINFLOW value of 1. If total
COUNTING damage D < 1 life is
predicted to be 1/D
repeats

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-32
DAMAGE COUNTING WITH MINER PALMGREN-MINER DAMAGE SUMMATION LAW
300 Cycles
Material Life Curve

100 MPa

60000 N

Range
Ni
Damage = ∑
i Nf
300
∴ Accumulated damage = = 0 .5 % Life
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
60000 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-34

EFFECT OF MINER’S RULE OF S-N CURVE LINEAR (MINER) DAMAGE THEORY


Advantages:
1. Simple
Original S-N Curve
ude (log scale)

2. Generally falls within the ball park of tests


S-N Curve after
S1 Application of Stress S1
n
e.g. Σ( ni ⁄ Nfi ) varies between 0.61 to 1.45 - Mean is 1.0
for 1 cycles
Stress Amplitu

Disadvantage:
n1
Assumes that the level of stress has no effect on the
damage ratio, for example: tests do indicate that high
N1 N1
stress cycles followed by low stress cycles cause more
damage than the other way around.
Cycles to Failure (log scale)
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-36
NON-LINEAR DAMAGE THEORY

p
Advantages: - D = (nf/Nfi) takes into account
both sequence & load level effects.
-if p is known well experiments evidence
suggests we get somewhat better results.
Disadvantages: - p has to be determined
experimentally from a family of stress curves VARIABLE AMPLITUDE LOADS: ESTIMATING
of a given material and so is very difficult to
obtain. LIFETIME
-for most situations load histories are pseudo-
random, i.e. we don’t know load history.
-finding p is difficult-need many tests at
different stress levels.

Conclusion: Nonlinear theory does not buy us much and is difficult to use.
Consequently it is not used in practice, and therefore is not in MSC Fatigue.
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-38

WHAT DRIVES THE FATIGUE CRACK? RAINFLOW CYCLE COUNTING

● Stress or Strain Cycles:


Stress or Strain
Stress or Strain

Time Time

Time History Peak Valley Rainflow Cycle


Extraction Counting

● Require Cycle Range & Mean


PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-40
RAINFLOW CYCLE COUNTING (CONT.) CYCLE COUNT MATRIX
● The story goes Matsuishi and Endo got the idea for the
method while watching rain water cascading down a
pagoda roof.
● Basic rules: rain flows down from each turning point and
continues until either:
1. it is interrupted by flow from above, or
2. it reaches a turning point which is larger that the one it started
from and in the same sense
● Good way of representing cycles is Rainflow Cycle
Count Matrix

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-42

RAINFLOW COUNTING AND STRESS/STRAIN SPACE PRACTICAL RAINFLOW COUNTING: RESERVOIR


METHOD

● A Reservoir is created using


the peak stress as starting
point (outer hysteresis loop)
● The water is drained from the
absolute minimum and the
the “depth” of each residual
water pocket is recorded
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-44
RAINFLOW COUNTING AND STRESS/STRAIN SPACE DAMAGE COUNTING WITH MINER
● Materials under cyclic loading exhibit “material 300 Cycles
memory” effect (they “remember” the largest Material Life Curve
previously reached stress-strain state)
S
● What is stress-strain curve in monotonic loading is
hysteresis loop in cyclic loading 100 MPa

● Rainflow counting identifies closed hysteresis loops


as cycles: 60000 N
● some cycles stand within the largest hysteresis loop and
some hang; this depends on cycle sequence Range
Ni
Damage = ∑
i Nf
300
∴ Accumulated damage = = 0 .5 % Life
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
60000
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-46

ANALYSIS ROUTE – AN OVERVIEW FACTORS INFLUENCING FATIGUE LIFE


Time History Peak Valley Rainflow Cycle ● Mean stress
Lose Frequency Lose Sequence
Information
Extraction Counting
Information
Stress or Strain
Stress or Strain

Time Time

LIFE 100 MPa

60000
N

Life Damage Histogram Damage Counting


PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-47 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-48
MEAN STRESSES MEAN STRESSES (CONT.)
● Stress ratio: R = σmin/σmax
Stress
● Most fatigue tests are conducted at R = -1 (fully reversed
amplitude
loading).
● If we have cycles with other R values we should make
N = constant for all points
corrections to the stress range in order to be able to
compare the cycles to the S-N curve determined at R=-1.
● Note: compressive mean stresses do not influence
fatigue life.

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-49 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-50

MEAN STRESS CORRECTIONS MEAN STRESS CORRECTIONS (CONT.)


● Most popular mean stress corrections are
Goodman and Gerber methods.
● Real test data tend to lie between the two, with
the Goodman method being more conservative
(i.e. safer).
● A third method called Soderberg is very
conservative (uses yield rather than ultimate)

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-51 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-52
CORRECTING FOR THE EFFECT OF MEAN STRESS HAIGH DIAGRAM
● Goodman method
σa σm
+ =1 UNSAFE
Se Su
Un-Safe
● Gerber method
2
σa σ 
+ m =1
Se  Su  SAFE
Soderberg line
σ a = stress amplitude Un-Safe
σ m = mean stress
S u = ultimate tensile stress
S e = equivalent stress for σ m = 0
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-53 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-54

FACTORS INFLUENCING FATIGUE LIFE COMPONENT SIZE


● Mean stress
● Component size Difference between small laboratory specimens and
large engineering structures

Influence of Specimen Size on Endurance Limit:

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-55 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-56
COMPONENT SIZE (CONT.) FACTORS INFLUENCING FATIGUE LIFE
● Mean stress
● Component size
The endurance limit used for design (Se) can be calculated
from the experimental endurance limit (S’e) from any size ● Type of loading
specimen: Se=S’e Csize

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-57 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-58

TYPE OF LOADING FACTORS INFLUENCING FATIGUE LIFE


● Mean stress
Problem:
● Component size
● Fatigue data from rotating bend tests ● Type of loading
● But structure loaded in tension or torsion ● Notches and discontinuities

● A conservative estimate of the ratio of endurance


limits for axial to bending is 0.7
Se (axial) ~ 0.70 Se(bending)
● A similar ratio of 0.577 can be used for torsion:
Se (torsion) ~ 0.577 Se(bending)

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-59 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-60
NOTCHES STRESS CONCENTRATION FACTORS
● Another factor that will reduce the life of a component is
a notch or stress concentration.
● Usually, unless the metal is of very high strength, the
fatigue limit of the component is not reduced by as much
as you might expect from the Kt factor.
● The difference between Kt and Kf is due to the notch
sensitivity of the material, which is greatest for high
strength metals.

Example from Peterson’s Stress Concentration Factors (Walter D. Piley)


PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-61 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-62

DEALING WITH STRESS CONCENTRATIONS EFFECT OF STRESS CONCENTRATION IN FATIGUE


● It is seldom possible to stick the strain gauges at the
critical location. In fatigue, the effect of a stress concentrating notch is to
reduce the fatigue stress at a given life. This is defined as the
● In practice put the strain gauges close to the critical
“Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor” and is given the symbol
location and use a stress correction factor ‘ Kt’ to scale
Kf. Strictly, Kf can only be obtained from long life fatigue tests
them up to the critical value.
and is a ratio:
Un-notched fatigue strength
Kf =
Actual Stress at Critical Fatigue strength for the notch
location
σ = S . Kt It is dependant on material as well as local geometry and is
generally less than Kt .
Measured nominal stress = S

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-63 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-64
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN Kf AND Kt RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN Kf AND Kt (CONT.)
Kt depends on geometry only and is relatively easy to obtain
but Kf depends on material as well, and in theory, should be
EMPIRICALLY, it has been found that:
measured for all possible combinations of both. Can we derive
Kf from Kt ? 1
q =
(1+a/r)
First, we define the parameter, q, the notch sensitivity factor where r is the notch root radius and “a” is a function of
as: material UTS:
(Kf - 1) a = 0.0254 ( 2079 / UTS )1.8 for units in MPa & mm
q =
(Kt - 1) Combining gives an EMPIRICAL rule for Kf from Kt:
● For notch insensitive materials: Kf =1 & q=0
● For perfectly notch sensitive materials: Kf = Kt & q=1 Kt - 1
Kf = 1 +
1+a/r
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-65 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-66

TWO WAYS OF USING Kt IN S-N ANALYSIS EFFECT OF Kt AND Kf ON FATIGUE LIFE


Modify the time history Modify Fatigue Life Curve
● Calculate new time ● Reduce the fatigue life NOTCHED UNNOTCHED

history by multiplying the curve. 1000


800
original by Kt ● This uses a value called 600

● This appears the easiest the fatigue reduction SMOOTH

Amplitude (MPa)
400

but could take a long time factor Kf


to compute with large ● Kf is a function of Kt and is 200
Kt=3, Kf=2.67
time history files. a material’s susceptibility
to notches.
● Conservatively use:
Kf = Kt 1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6 1E7 1E8

Life (Cycles)

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-67 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-68
EFFECT OF Kt AND Kf ON FATIGUE LIFE (CONT.) EFFECT OF NOTCH FACTOR
● The notch does not have such a large effect at short
lives as it does at long 1000 cycles Transition Life

● This is often dealt with by having a separate Kf’ factor at


1,000 cycles
Kf’

Stress
Kf

Life
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-69 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-70

CURVE FOR ESTIMATION OF Kf’ FACTORS INFLUENCING FATIGUE LIFE


● Mean stress
● Component size
● Type of loading
● Notches and discontinuities
● Surface treatment & finish

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-71 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-72
SURFACE TREATMENT & FINISH DEALING WITH SURFACE EFFECTS
● Fatigue cracks usually start at the surface, therefore the
condition of the surface can have a large impact on the Increasing residual pre-compression at the
surface rises and tilts the fatigue life curve as
life of a component. shown. The greatest benefits are realised in
the high cycle, low stress ranges.
● The smoother the surface, the longer it takes to initiate a
ε/S Reducing surface quality causes the life curve
fatigue crack. to pitch downwards in a similar manner.

● Residual stresses in the surface can also affect the rate


of initiation. Residual compression will delay the crack
initiation in high cycle load cases.
● Surface treatments are used to induce residual surface
stresses. 1000 Cycles 10 7 Cycles N

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-73 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-74

SURFACE FINISH SURFACE FINISH (CONT.)


● The effect of surface finish is typically obtained from curves
such as on the previous slide.
● The strength reduction factor is related to the surface finish factor
and the strength of the steel.
● Sometimes the curves are for qualitative finishes such as “good
machined”.
● The effect of surface roughness is typically accounted for
by applying a reduction factor to the stress at the
endurance or fatigue limit.
● On a log-log plot, the slope of the stress life curve is adjusted, with
the stress at 1000 cycles being unaffected.

Note: this curves is for steels only


PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-75 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-76
CORRECTION FOR SURFACE FINISH THE EFFECT OF RESIDUAL COMPRESSION

1000 cycles Transition Life

Compression Tension Compression Tension Compression Tension

+ =
Stress

Surface Compression Oscillating bending Resulting surface stress


Stress Stress never goes into tension
therefore surface crack
doesn’t initiate

This effect only works for high cycle cases where the applied surface stress
Life
is insufficient to overcome the residual pre-compression.
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-77 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-78

HOW CAN WE GET PRE-COMPRESSION? GOODMAN BASED FACTOR OF SAFETY


Shot Peening ● The factor by which we can increase our alternating
● Fire ball bearings at the surface to induce pre-compression stress (for a given mean stress), without causing any
Cold Rolling fatigue failure.
● Roll the component surface to induce pre-compression in the σa × f σm
surface -------------- + -------- = 1
S σ
Nitriding e u
● Heat up component in an ammonia environment. The component
expands and nitrates from the gas react with the metal. The f × σa = Se ( 1 – σm ⁄ σ u )
component contracts on cooling and is compressed.

S
∴ f = σe (1 – σm/σu)
a

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-79 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-80
GOODMAN BASED FACTOR OF SAFETY CALCULATION SUMMARY: S-N METHOD
● Estimates the total fatigue life to catastrophic failure.

Goodman Based:
● Makes no distinction between crack initiation and crack
growth.
S e ( 1 – σm ⁄ σ u ) CSurf × C Size
Factor of Safety, f = --------------------------------------- × ------------------------------------- ● Uses local or nominal stress as the control parameter
σ k
a f ● Fatigue life computed from the log stress vs log cycles (S-N)
curve.
● Fatigue life estimates are associated with a probability of
Gerber Based: 2 1⁄2 failure due to the large amount of scatter in the S-N curve.
S 1 – (σ ⁄ σ ) 
e m u  CSurf × CSize ● Reduces complex random waveforms to a list of cycles with
Factor of Safety, f = ---------------------------------------------------------- × -------------------------------------
σa kf a given range and mean using Rainflow cycle counting
● Mean stress effects are taken into account by Goodman or
Gerber algorithms.
PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-81 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-82

SUMMARY: S-N METHOD (cont.) STRESS-LIFE IN MSC FATIGUE

S-N method is appropriate for assessing damage in: Features


● Elastic Stresses
● Long life fatigue problems where there is little plasticity since
● Rainflow Cycle Counting
the S-N method is based on nominal elastic stress S-N Data Plot
MANTEN_SN
SRI1: 3162 b1: -0.2 b2: 0 E: 2.034E5 UTS: 600
● Mean Stress Correction
● Components where the crack initiation and growth models ● Welded Structures
are not appropriate, e.g. composites and welds.
1E4

● Statistical Confidence Parameters


Stress Range (MPa)

● Situations where a large amount of pre-existing S-N data is 1E3


● Palmgren-Miner Linear Damage
available 1E2
● User Defined Life
● Components which are required by a control body to be ● Material and Component S-N
designed for fatigue using standard data such as the MIL 1E1
1E0 1E1 1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5
Life (Cycles)
1E6 1E7 1E8 1E9 ● Surface Conditions
handbook data ● Factor of Safety Analysis
● Biaxiality Indicators

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-83 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-84
WORKSHOPS

● Perform “Workshop 3: Rainflow Cycle Counting”


from MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide

● Perform “Workshop 4: Component S-N Analysis”


from MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide

● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you


don’t understand

PAT318, Section 16, September 2008 PAT318, Section 16, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-85 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S16-86
SECTION 17
STRAIN-LIFE (E-N) METHOD

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-2

STRAIN-LIFE (E-N) THEORY STRAIN-LIFE (E-N) THEORY

● Strain-life method is one of the most common life ● Practically, crack initiation means that a crack of around
prediction methods used in the automotive industry. 1-2 mm has developed. This is often a high proportion of
the component life.
● It is also called:
● local strain approach ● Many automotive components are designed to survive
● crack initiation method some significant plastic strains in use (especially on the
● strain-life approach test track!). The E-N method will handle these better
● E-N (or ε-N) method than the S-N method which basically ignores plasticity.

● The E-N method is not very suitable for structural joints


such as welds, spot welds etc.

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-4
E-N METHOD - SIMILITUDE STRAIN-LIFE CONCEPTS

ε ε Local Strains

Stress-Strain Hysteresis

The crack initiation life of this . . . . . is the same as this . . . . .


if both experience the same local strains Cyclic vs Monotonic Strain-Life Curve
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-6

STRAIN-LIFE TESTING STRAIN CONTROLLED TESTING


● Normally, polished cylindrical specimens of around 6-8 ● Test carried out to ASTM E606
mm diameter are tested according to the appropriate or equivalent
standards, though flat coupons may also be used. ● High quality test specimen
● The tests are carried out in strain control; the test ● Highly polished surface
machine uses the output from the strain gauge (clip
● Precision machined for
gauge) to provide feedback to the servo-controlled test
minimum surface residual
machine.
stress
● Strain monitoring using high
quality extensometer
● Alignment very important!

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-8
E-N ANALYSIS STRAIN CONTROL VS STRESS CONTROL
● Input is time history of STRAIN
● Also known as “Low Cycle Fatigue” or “Local Strain ● Strain Control uses an extensometer in the servo loop.
Approach” ● Stress Control is load control (uses a load cell).
● Local strains can be elastic or plastic hence its suitability
for Low Cycle fatigue ● Strain Control generates plastic strain: the parameter
which directly controls fatigue damage.
Plastic (Low Cycle
● Stress Control controls the wrong parameter.
ε Fatigue Line)

Elastic (High Cycle ● Local Stress and Strain are only “equivalent”, ie. linearly
Fatigue Line) related, under purely elastic conditions, ie. when there
shouldn’t be any fatigue damage.

N
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-10

CYCLIC SOFTENING CYCLIC HARDENING


strain(mm/mm) STRAIN.DAC strain(mm/mm) STRAIN.DAC
SOFT.DAC HARD.DAC
stress stress
MPa MPa
5E-3 5E-3
STRESS-STRAIN RESPONSE STRESS-STRAIN RESPONSE
0 Time range : 0 secs to 435 secs 0 Time range : 0 secs to 435 secs
800 800
-5E-3 -5E-3
1
7,9
600 600 5
0 100 200 300 400 3 0 100 200 300 400 3
Se c s . S ec s .
CONTROL PARAMETER 5
400 7 CONTROL PARAMETER 400 1
9
stress(MPa) SOFT.DAC stress(MPa) HARD.DAC
600 200 600 200
1
5 7 9
400 400 3
0 0
200 200

0 0
-200 -200
8 -200
-200 6
4 2
-400 -400 4 -400 6 8 -400
2 4
2
0 100 200 300 400 0 100 200 300 400 6,8
Se c s . S ec s .
-600 -600
RESPONSE PARAMETER -0.01 -5E-3 0 5E-3 0.01 RESPONSE PARAMETER -5E-3 0 5E-3 0.01
Screen 1 Screen 1 Screen 1 Screen 1
strain (mm/mm) strain (mm/mm)

Note: Hysteresis loops usually stabilize after some number of cycles Note: Hysteresis loops usually stabilize after some number of cycles
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-12
CYCLIC STRESS-STRAIN CURVE DETERMINATION STRESS-STRAIN RELATIONSHIPS
Ramberg-Osgood
Companion samples are Relationships Cyclic Stress-Strain Plot
tested at various strain
Monotonic
levels and cycled until the
1
hysteresis loops become σ σ n
stabilized. Stable hysteresis ε = + 
loops are superimposed and E K

Stress (MPa)
the tips connected to form Cyclic
the cyclic stress-strain
1
curve. This method is time σ 
σa n'
consuming and requires ε= + a
many samples.
E  K'  Strain (M/M)

Companion Samples Method


PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-14

CYCLIC STRESS-STRAIN BEHAVIOUR CYCLIC STRESS-STRAIN BEHAVIOUR (CONT.)


Masing’s Hypothesis:
● The hysteresis curve is the same shape as the cyclic stress-strain
curve, but doubled up in both directions.

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-16
STRAIN-LIFE DATA FROM LCF TESTS COFFIN-MANSON-BASQUIN EQUATION
● Basquin showed that for high cycle fatigue, fatigue life ε tot = ε el + ε pl
has a power law relationship with elastic strain.
● Coffin and Manson did the same for low cycle fatigue
and plastic strain. Basquin Coffin-Manson
σ 'f b
● Combine the two and you have a relationship between ε el = (2Nf ) ε pl = ε 'f (2Nf )c
total strain and fatigue life covering low and high cycle E
fatigue.

σ 'f b c
εa = (2Nf ) + εf' (2Nf )
E
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-18

ELASTIC & PLASTIC COMPONENTS OF HYSTERESIS STRAIN-LIFE CURVE FROM LCF TEST
LOOP Total strain curve fit Total strain data

Elastic strain curve fit Elastic strain data

Plastic strain curve fit Plastic strain data


Total strain range
1E0
200
Sf': 670 MPa

b : -0.0582
(MPa)

1 E -1
Stress (MPa

Plastic strain range (X/Y)

S tr a in
0 Ef': 0.374
1 E -2
c : -0.54

E : 2.05E5 MPa
L o g

(X/Y)
-200 1 E -3
: Run-out pts

1 E -4
-4000 -2000 0 2000 4000
1E0 1E1 1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6 1E7 1E8
Strain (µε
µε)
µε
Log Life (Reversals)

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-20
TRANSITION LIFE STRAIN-LIFE CURVE
At shorter lives more plastic
strain is present and the
hysteresis loop is wider. At
The Transition Life, 2Nf, represents longer lives the loop is narrower,
the life at which the elastic and plastic representing less plastic strain
curves intersect.

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-22

S-N AND E-N LIFE CURVES

Low Cycle High Cycle S-N Life Curve


Region Region 'Infinite Life'
(EN Method) (SN or EN Method)
E-N Life Curve

ε/σ VARIABLE AMPLITUDE LOADS:


S-N & E-N curves coincide
in high cycle region COUNTING CYCLES
because nominal stresses
will be linear elastic

E-N can also be used in


low cycle region, but S-N
cannot, because linear
stress-strain relationship is
invalid
1000 Cycles 10 7 Cycles N
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-24
MEMORY EFFECT & CYCLE COUNTING RAINFLOW COUNTING & STRESS-STRAIN SPACE
strain
● Materials under cyclic loading exhibit “material memory”,
ie, they “remember” the largest previously reached stress-
strain state

strain

strain

strain
time time time
● What is stress-strain curve in monotonic loading is
hysteresis loop in cyclic loading
● Rainflow counting identifies closed hysteresis loops as

stress
stress

stress
stress
cycles
● Some cycles stand within the largest hysteresis loop and some
hang; this depends on cycle sequence strain strain strain
strain

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-26

MEAN STRESS CORRECTIONS


● Two main methods for correcting for mean stress in the
local strain (E-N) approach:

● Morrow
Moves the elastic life line up and down according to
MEAN STRESS CORRECTIONS the mean stress of each cycle

● Smith-Watson-Topper (SWT or STW)


Uses a damage parameter which includes the
maximum stress of each cycle

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-28
MORROW CORRECTION SMITH-WATSON-TOPPER CORRECTION

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-30

SMITH-WATSON-TOPPER VS MORROW

● SWT makes bigger corrections than Morrow

● SWT tends to be conservative when mean stress is


tensile ELASTIC-PLASTIC CORRECTION
● SWT tends to be non-conservative when mean stress is
AND LOCAL GEOMETRY
compressive

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-32
STRAIN-LIFE MODELLING ELASTIC-PLASTIC CORRECTION
The Local Strain Method requires the notch root local
Elastic FE Strain
stresses and strains to model the plasticity that leads to
fatigue damage. These can be derived by:
1
● Measurement from a strain gauge precisely located at Cyclic Stress-Strain Curve
2
the critical location.
● Elastic-plastic finite element analysis with a very refined σ
Neuber Equation
mesh. Solution point

● Using an empirical rule, usually NEUBER’S RULE (but ∆σ∆ε=Ε∆εe2


not always) to estimate elastic-plastic strain from nominal
strain or linear FE results.

Neuber worked in statics, not fatigue, but noticed that the ratios of plastic
strain and plastic stress were different.

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
∆εe ε
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-34

USE OF Kf IN STRAIN-LIFE MODELLING USE OF Kf IN STRAIN-LIFE MODELLING (CONT.)


● The strain concentration factor: Kε = ε / e is > Kt Another re-arrangement gives:

● The stress concentration factor: Kσ = σ / s is < Kt ( Kt e ) 2 E = σ . ε


(after plastic yielding).
Neither are known but Neuber found that their geometric in which the LHS is known.
average was equal to Kt . Hence Neuber’s Rule is simply:
This can be solved with the cyclic stress strain curve equation
Kε . Kσ = ( Kt ) 2 simultaneously to derive σ and ε .

Re-arrangement of this Rule gives a useful equation: Topper simply replaced Kt by Kf to make Neuber’s Rule
applicable in fatigue analysis for local stress strain tracking.
( Kt ) 2 s .e = σ . ε

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-36
ELASTIC-PLASTIC CORRECTION INCLUDING Kf REFINEMENTS TO THE NEUBER METHOD

● The Neuber Method is an approximation, suitable for


stress and strain estimation where plasticity is limited,
2 CSSC e.g., at notches.
3 ● At locations where the notch is not well defined, it may
σ Kf underestimate the strains.
Neuber Equation ● The Seeger-Beste and Mertens-Dittmann methods use a
Solution point
shape factor or plastic strain concentration factor to
s modify the amount of the estimated stress redistribution
1

ε
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-38

SEEGER-BESTE AND MERTENS-DITTMAN METHODS MERTENS-DITTMAN METHOD


These methods take into account plasticity which is more Graphical representation of Mertens-Dittmann Method
extensive by moving the origin of the Neuber hyperbola to a
point calculated using plastic strain concentration factors :

<
σe σ =σ e /α p
(σ − σ )(ε e − ε )= (σ − σ )(ε − ε )
<

<

<

<

Mertens-Dittmann Equation :
e
σ

<
ε = ε e /α p
(σ − σ )εe = (σ − σ )ε
<
<

Seeger-Beste Equation :

<
e
<

<
σ new origin at ( ε ,σ )
<

<

where : σ =σ e /α p and ε = ε e /α p
L
α = p εe ε
<

p L ε
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
y PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-40
SEEGER-BESTE METHOD SHAPE FACTORS
(PLASTIC STRAIN CONCENTRATIONS)
Graphical representation of Seeger-Beste Method Assuming elastic-perfectly plastic loading, the yield
moment for a rectangular cross section bar in bending is:
σy

<
σe σ = σ /α BA 2
e p
A
My = σy
σ
6
B

<
new origin at ( 0 , σ ) The plastic limit moment is :
<

σ σy
BA 2
Mp = σy
4

εe ε So the shape factor αp = Mp/My = 1.5


PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-42

SURFACE FACTORS USE OF Kf FOR SURFACE FINISH


As in the S-N method, surface factors can be used to modify the strain life curves to Strain Life Plot
EN24V
account for surface finish etc. These factors are applied to the elastic strain-life curve at
Sf': 1282 b: -0.075 Ef': 1.424 c: -0.732
the endurance limit. en24mod
Sf': 1282 b: -0.1325 Ef': 1.424 c: -0.732
Polished, untreated, stress free, is considered as the starting point with Surface Factor = 1
(as in LCF test specimens).
1E0

A m p lit u d e ( M /M )
Extra factors are required for:
1E-1

● surface finish (ground, machined, hot rolled, cast, Polished


forged, corroded);
1E-2

● surface treatment (nitrided, shot peened, cold rolled):


Forged
● loading mode (axial, bending, torsion)
S t r a in

1E-3

● anything else (environment etc.).


1E-4
1E0 1E1 1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6 1E7 1E8 1E9
Life (Reversals)
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-44
STRESS-STRAIN TRACKING
e(t) P
Nominal stress, strain - s,e

DAMAGE CALCULATION CSSC SWT-Life


Cyclic Stress-Strain Plot STW Life Plot
Mild_Steel Mild_Steel
n': 0.159 K': 816 E: 2E5 Sf': 757 b: -0.089 Ef': 0.541 c: -0.547

564

(M P a )
1E2

( M P a )
1E1

P a ra m e te r
S tr e s s
1E0

S T W
1E-1

0 1E-2
0 0.01
Strain (M/M)
0.03 1E0 1E1 1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5
Life (Reversals)
1E6 1E7 1E8 1E9

Local stress, strain - σ,ε


PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-46

STRESS-STRAIN TRACKING (CONT.) STRESS-STRAIN TRACKING– 1st EXCURSION


A  B = e1 , B  C = ∆e2
e(t) C  D = ∆e3 , D  E = ∆e4 e(t) σ
B Kf.e1 , Kf.s1 = NP1
e1
B Kf.s1
A B
D
known Kf s 1 = E . e1
A
s1 ε1 , σ1 = NP1
CSSC
ε = σ / E + (σ / k’)1/n’
C ε
E A e1 Kf.e1
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-47 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-48
STRESS-STRAIN TRACKING (CONT.) STRESS-STRAIN TRACKING – 2nd EXCURSION
e(t) B ∆e2 B (ε1 , σ1 )

∆s2
σ
Basic Rule: C
Reset the origin and set off in the
appropriate direction! 2 x CSSC
2 1/n’
∆ε = ∆σ / E + 2(∆σ / 2k’)
∆ε2 . ∆σ2 = NP2 ε
A

plotting position
is ε2 =(εε1- ∆ε2), Kf. ∆e2 , Kf. ∆s2 = NP2
σ2=(σσ1- ∆σ2)
C (εε2 , σ2 )
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-49 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-50

STRESS-STRAIN TRACKING – 3rd EXCURSION STRESS-STRAIN TRACKING – 4th EXCURSION


B
B (εε1 , σ1 )
e(t) e(t)
D B
D
σ D
σ D (ε 3 , σ 3 )
C C
E

plotting position is ε
∆ε3 . ∆σ3 = NP3 ε A
NOT ε4 =(εε3- ∆ε4),
A (0,0) σ4=(σ
σ3- ∆σ4)
plotting position
E
is ε3 =(εε2+ ∆ε3),
BUT ε4 =(εε2- ∆ε5), C
σ3=(σσ2+ ∆σ3)
C (εε2 , σ2 ) σ4=(σσ2- ∆σ5) Not E
PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-51 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-52
EXTRACTED CYCLE DAMAGE FROM THE EXTRACTED CYCLE
σ
STW Life Plot
Mild_Steel
Sf': 757 b: -0.089 Ef': 0.541 c: -0.547

σmax

SWT = σmax . ∆ε/2


∆ε

(M P a )
1E2

1E1

P a ra m e te r
ε
1E0

SWT = σmax . ∆ε/2


∆ε

S T W
1E-1

d=1/ Nf 1E-2
1E0 1E1 1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6 1E7 1E8 1E9
∆ε 2Nf Life (Reversals)

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-53 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-54

DAMAGE SUMMATION FROM ALL CYCLES IMPLEMENTATION IN MSC FATIGUE


● For each node or element:
● True stress-strain tracking is too time-consuming
● So rainflow cycle count elastic strain time history
● Damage for each cycle: d i = 1 / N fi
● Correct each cycle for plasticity using Neuber (or
similar correction)
● Damage sum for the “repeat”: D = Σ di ● Calculate mean stress for each cycle for both ‘hanging’
and ‘standing’ within largest cycle
● Calculate damage for ‘hanging’ and ‘standing’ and
● Life to crack initiation in “repeats”: Ni = 1 /D
record mean damage for each cycle
● Sum damage for all cycles to give total life

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-55 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-56
CRACK INITIATION IN MSC FATIGUE CASE STUDY: E-N ANALYSIS OF A “SPIDER”
Features:
● Based on Local Strain Concepts ε Strain

● Mean Stress Correction


Perform simple
crack initiation
● Elastic-Plastic Conversion Time
1/2cycle
1/2cycle analysis of a
● Statistical Confidence Parameters 1cycle
“spider”.
1cycle
1cycle
● Palmgren-Miner Linear Damage 1/2cycle
s Single input load.
● User Defined Life
● Cyclic Stress-Strain Modeling
Create new
e database and read
● Surface Conditions
in the results.
● Factor of Safety Analysis
● Biaxiality Indicators

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-57 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-58

REVIEW STRESS CONTOURS SOLUTION PARAMETERS

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-59 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-60
LOADING INFO PLOT LIFE CONTOURS
● Create unit sinusoidal load (sine01)
● Use MANTEN material
● Submit Job

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-61 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-62

WORKSHOPS

● Perform “Workshop 5: A Simple e-N Analysis”


from MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide

● Perform “Workshop 6: Residual Stress”


from MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide

● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you


don’t understand

PAT318, Section 17, September 2008 PAT318, Section 17, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-63 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S17-64
SECTION 18
FATIGUE CRACK PROPAGATION

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-2

FATIGUE CRACK PROPAGATION METHOD (LEFM) FRACTURE MECHANICS TRIANGLE


● What remnant life is there after initiation?
Stress Intensity (K)

● What is the safe life or inspection schedule for a component that is or


may be cracked?

● The crack growth method is based on the principles of Linear Elastic


Fracture Mechanics (LEFM)

● It relates stress intensity factors to crack growth rates

● It uses cycle-by-cycle calculations to predict lifetimes


Crack Size (a) σ)
Stress (σ
● It is frequently used in aerospace, offshore, and power generation
industries Require 2 of 3
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-4
FRACTURE MECHANICS RECTANGLE CRACK STRESS CONCENTRATION
A crack is an extreme stress/strain concentrator!

Final Crack Size (af) Cycles to Failure (Nf)

Initial Crack Size (ai) ∆σ)


∆σ
Stress Range (∆σ Elastic Stress Concentration:
σmax = Ktσ Kt=3 Kt=(1+2a/b) b = 0  Kt = ∞
Require 3 of 4
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-6

MODES OF CRACK OPENING MECHANICS OF CRACKING

● Stress Intensity Factor KI

● General form of K:

opening shearing/sliding
K = Yσ πa where the geometry function
tearing
Y = f( a/w, B, ... )
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-8
TYPICAL COMPLIANCE FUNCTIONS TYPICAL COMPLIANCE FUNCTIONS (CONT.)
Internal crack in pressurized tube

● Through Crack in Infinite Plate


Y=1

● Edge Crack in Semi-Infinite Plate


Y = 1.12

● Edge Crack in Finite Plate


Y = 1.12 - 0.231(a/w) + 10.55(a/w)2
- 21.72(a/w)3 + 30.30(a/w)4
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-10

TYPICAL COMPLIANCE FUNCTIONS (CONT.) K CONTROLLED FRACTURE


● In small scale yielding, K controls everything near the tip:
● plasticity
● void growth
● cracking
● Fracture occurs when K = KIC (the fracture toughness)

K controls the
stress around the tip

Fracture
Zone

Plastic
Zone

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-12
ASSUMPTIONS OF SMALL SCALE YIELDING STAGES OF FATIGUE CRACK GROWTH

● Plastic zone size:


2
1  
rp = K 
6π σ 
 y

● For LEFM to be valid, the plastic zone size must be


small compared to crack length a and component
geometry:
1
rp ≤ (a, t , b, w,...)
25
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-14

FATIGUE CRACK GROWTH MECHANICS CRACK PROPAGATION METHOD & SIMILITUDE


● Reversed plasticity
● Corrosion

The crack in . . . . . . . grows at the same rate as the test specimen


if both experience the same stress intensity factors
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-16
CRACK GROWTH AND STRESS INTENSITY PARIS LAW AND PROPAGATION RATES

∆K = Y ∆σ √ πa
Fast Fracture
Effects
da
---
dN

Threshold
Effects
Paris Law Region

da
--- = C∆Km
dN
∆K

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-18

FACTORS INFLUENCING CRACK GROWTH RATE PLASTIC ZONE AND CRACK CLOSURE

● As crack grows, small region of plasticity develops around


● Crack tip plasticity (crack closure)
crack tip
● Plastically deformed regions are surrounded by material
● Mean stresses that remains elastic
● As material is unloaded, plastic region causes crack
● Threshold region (for low loads or short cracks) surfaces to be pulled toward each other causing CRACK
CLOSURE
● Variable amplitude loading (overloads) ● Crack closure can be induced by:
● overloads
● corrosion effects
● Environment
● surface roughness

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-20
CRACK TIP PLASTICITY MEAN STRESS (R-RATIO) EFFECTS

Kmin
R=
Kmax

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-22

SHORT CRACKS AND THRESHOLD REGION VARIABLE AMPLITUDE LOADS


● SHORT CRACKS:
● tend to be free of closure
High - low sequences
effects. change the crack closure
● In general, LEFM is not
applicable
● They typically have
higher growth rates than
long cracks.

● NOTE:
cracks do not grow if
∆K is smaller than
threshold value ∆Kth.

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-24
ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS CALCULATING LIFE

Crack growth rates are


higher in corrosive
environments (e.g. salt
water) than in air.
Require:
● Initial crack size (a0)
They are the lowest in
● Final crack size (af)
vacuum.
● Stress range (∆σ)
Issues of: ● Compliance (Y)
● Stress corrosion cracking ● Material growth law (c, m)
(SCC)
● Hydrogen embrittlement

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-26

CRACK GROWTH LAWS EFFECTIVE ∆K APPROACH

● The key to MSC Fatigue crack growth analysis is the


● There are many crack growth “laws” in the literature:
correction of the apparent ∆K (based on applied load)
● Paris (the most well-known)
to an effective ∆K (i.e. the crack driving force actually
● Forman (MSC Fatigue uses similar method for fast fracture
correction)
seen at the crack front)
● Lucas-Klesnil ● Usual Method:
● Elber da
= f (∆K , R, ∆K TH , K IC , history , environment )
● Walker dN
● Wheeler
● MSC Fatigue Method:
● Willenborg (MSC Fatigue uses extension of this model)
∆K eff = f (∆K , R, ∆KTH , K IC , history , environment )
da
= C ∆K eff
m

dN
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-28
ANALYSIS STEPS IN MSC FATIGUE IMPLEMENTATION IN MSC FATIGUE

● Input next cycle


● Calculate apparent ∆K from lookup table Materials
Time Cycle
Database
● Correct to effective ∆K for: Counter
TCY MDB
Manager
● closure/short crack
● notch field influence Geometry
Function KSN CRACK GROWTH
● static fracture mode contribution Library ANALYSER
● history effects
● environmental effects
● da = C ∆Keffm CRG

● a = a+∆a
● If no fast fracture, go to next cycle
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-30

CYCLE-BY-CYCLE CRACK GROWTH SUMMARY OF APPROACH


● Features:
● Cycle-by-cycle modelling ● Identify critical region and select node/element for nominal
● Time-sequenced rainflow cycle stress
counting
● Multi-environment material ● Identify geometry from library of compliance functions
properties
● Identify initial crack size
● Kitagawa minimum crack sizing
● Threshold modelling ● MSC Fatigue calculates change in crack length on a
● Crack closure and retardation cycle-by-cycle basis until fast fracture occurs
● User defined life
● Life estimates are normally within a factor of 2 if all the
● Fracture toughness failure
criterion control parameters are modeled correctly
● Surface or embedded cracks
● Modified Paris Law
(modified Willenborg model)
PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-32
APPLICATIONS OF CRACK GROWTH ANALYSIS EXAMPLE: CRACK PROPAGATION ANALYSIS
Lug with single load

● Design analysis
● Pre-prediction of test programs
● Inspection strategy
● Failure investigation
● Decision support

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-34

EXAMPLE: CRACK PROPAGATION ANALYSIS (CONT.) EXAMPLE: CRACK PROPAGATION ANALYSIS (CONT.)

K Solution Library Compliance Function Plot

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-36
EXAMPLE: CRACK PROPAGATION ANALYSIS (CONT.) EXAMPLE: CRACK PROPAGATION ANALYSIS (CONT.)

● Create a group “far_field” with node 223 in it only.

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-38

EXAMPLE: CRACK PROPAGATION ANALYSIS (CONT.) WORKSHOP

● Perform “Workshop 7: Introduction to Crack


Growth” from MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide

● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you


don’t understand

PAT318, Section 18, September 2008 PAT318, Section 18, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S18-40
SECTION 19
MULTIAXIAL FATIGUE

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-2

WHY DO MULTIAXIAL FATIGUE CALCULATIONS? LIFE PREDICTION PROCESS: E-N APPROACH

● Fatigue analysis is an increasingly important part of the


design and development process MEASURED
STRAINS plasticity
modelling
● Many components have multiaxial loads, and some of
those have multiaxial loading in critical locations damage
STRESS &
STRAIN model
LIFE
● Uniaxial methods may give poor answers needing bigger COMPONENTS

safety factors
ELASTIC constitutive
STRAINS model and
FROM FEA notch rule

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-4
2-D STRESS STATE 3-D STRESS STATE

σyy
σyy

σzz
τyx
τyz
τyx
τxz
τxy τzx σxx
σxx σxx σxx
τzy τxy
τxy

y y
τyx σzz

x σyy x
σyy
z

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-6

TENSOR REPRESENTATION OF STRESS STATE STRAIN TENSOR


● Stresses can be represented as ● Strains can also be
a tensor represented by tensors
● Diagonal terms are direct ● Diagonal terms are the direct
stresses
σxx τ xy τ xz  strains and the other terms are εxx εxy εxz 
Other terms are shear stresses
  shear strains  

τ σ τ ε ε ε
 yx yy yz 
● For equilibrium purposes it must  yx yy yz  ● For equilibrium the matrix is
εzx εzy εzz 
be symmetric
τzx τzy σzz  symmetric
 
● On free surface (z is surface   ● Shear strains, e.g. εxy are half
normal) all terms with “z” the engineering shear strain γxy
become zero. ● Can be written εij
● Can be written σij

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-8
TRANSFORMATION OF STRESS/STRAIN STRESS TENSOR ROTATION
● Stress or strain tensors can ~
Z be rotated to a different S' = TST
Z’
coordinate system by a l11
transformation matrix.
l12 l13 
 
Y’
● The matrix contains the T = l21 l22 l23 
direction cosines of the new l31 l32 l33 
Y co-ordinate axes in the old
system
l11, l12, l13 are the direction
X ● The tensor is pre-multiplied cosines of the X’ axis in the
X‘ by the matrix and post- original system and so on.
multiplied by its transpose

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-10

PRINCIPAL STRESSES (& STRAINS) MOHR’S CIRCLE FOR 2D STRESS


● The principal stress axes are the set in which the diagonal
terms disappear. In these directions the direct stresses
reach their extreme values
● The maximum shear strains occur at 45 degrees to the τxy
principal axes.
● The principal stresses can be calculated from: σ2 σy 2θ σ1 σ
3 2
σ − I1σ + I 2σ − I3C = 0 σx
where
I1 = σ x + σ y + σ z
I 2 = σ x σ y + σ y σ z + σ y σ z − τ2xy − τ2xz − τ2y z
−τxy
I3 = σ x σ y σ z + 2τ xy τ xzτ y z − σ x τ 2y z − σ y τ2xz − σ z τ2xy
τmax
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 τ
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-12
MOHR’S CIRCLE FOR 3D STRESS GENERALIZED HOOKE’S LAW FOR 3D (STRAIN)
σx v
εx = − (σ y + σ z )
E E
σy v
εy = − (σ z + σ x )
E E
σ v
ε z = z − (σ x + σ y )
σ3 σ2 σ1 σ E E
τ xy τ yz τ
γ xy = , γ yz = , γ zx = zx
G G G

E
τmax where G =
2(1 + v )
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 τ PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-14

GENERALIZED HOOKE’S LAW FOR 3D (STRESS) FREE SURFACE STRESSES

z
vE
σ xx = {ε xx + ε yy + ε zz } + E ε xx
(1 + v )(1 − 2v ) 1+ v
vE
σ yy = {ε xx + ε yy + ε zz } + E ε yy y
(1 + v )(1 − 2v ) 1+ v x
vE
σ zz = {ε xx + ε yy + ε zz } + E ε zz
(1 + v )(1 − 2v ) 1+ v

Stress state on free surface is biaxial - principal stresses σ1 and σ2


(where | σ1 |>| σ2 |) lie in the x-y plane

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-16
MULTIAXIAL ASSESSMENT EXAMPLE OF NEAR PROPORTIONAL LOADING
Strain(UE) S131A.DAC
1301
● Ratio of Principals or Biaxiality Ratio: Sample = 409.6
Npts = 9446

σ2 Max Y = 1301
Min Y = -392.3
ae = -392.3
σ1 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Seconds

Strain(UE) S131B.DAC
121.1
Sample = 409.6
● Stress state can be characterised by ratio of principal stresses Npts = 9446
and their orientation (angle) Max Y = 121.1
Min Y = -284.3
● If orientation and ratio are fixed, loading is proportional. -284.3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Seconds

● Otherwise loading is non-proportional Strain(UE) S131C.DAC


2663

● Biaxiality analysis: Sample = 409.6


Npts = 9446
● ae = -1  Pure Shear Max Y = 2663
Min Y = -298.7
● ae = +1  Equi-Biaxial -298.7
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
● ae = 0  Uniaxial Seconds

Screen 1

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-18

EXAMPLE OF NEAR PROPORTIONAL LOADING (CONT.) EXAMPLE OF NEAR PROPORTIONAL LOADING (CONT.)

S131.ABS
Strain
UE
S131.ABS
Strain
UE
● The left plot indicates that the ratio of the principal
stresses is nearly fixed at around 0.4, especially if the
5000
Tim e range : 0 secs to 23.06 secs
5000
Tim e range : 0 secs to 23.06 secs
smaller stresses are ignored.
4000 4000

3000 3000 ● The right hand plot shows that the orientation of the
2000 2000 principal stresses is more or less fixed.
1000 1000

0 0
● This is effectively a proportional loading
-1000
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1
-1000
-50 0 50
(these calculations assume elasticity)
Screen 1 Screen 1
Biaxiality Ratio (No units) Angle (Degrees)

Biaxiality ratio vs. σ1 Orientation of σ1 vs. σ1


PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-20
EXAMPLE OF NON-PROPORTIONAL LOADING EXAMPLE OF NON-PROPORTIONAL LOADING (CONT.)
GAGE 1X( uS) GAGE103.DAC
161.4
Sample = 200 GAGE1.ABS GAGE1.ABS
Stress Stress
Npts = 3.672E4 MPa MPa

Max Y = 161.4
Min Y = -81.32
Time range : 0 secs to 183.6 secs Time range : 0 secs to 183.6 secs
-81.32
0 50 100 150 200 200

GAGE 1Z( uS) GAGE102.DAC


559.5
Sample = 200 100 100

Npts = 3.672E4
Max Y = 559.5
Min Y = -274.6 0 0

-274.6
0 50 100 150

-100 -100
GAGE 1Y( uS) GAGE101.DAC
716.2
Sample = 200
Npts = 3.672E4 -200 -200
Max Y = 716.2 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 -50 0 50
Screen 1 Screen 1
Min Y = -651 Biaxiality R atio (No units) Angle (D egrees)

-651
0 50 100 150

S creen 1
Both the ratio and orientation of σ1 and σ2 vary considerably: non-proportional
loading.
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-22

EFFECT OF MULTIAXIALITY ON PLASTICITY, DEVIATORIC STRESSES


NOTCH MODELLING AND DAMAGE
A useful concept in multiaxial
Increasing fatigue and especially in plasticity
The deviatoric stresses
Difficulty is that of deviatoric stresses. The
Sx,y,z are given by:
φp ae (and Rarity) deviatoric stresses are the
components of stress that deviate S x = σ x − Ph
Uniaxial φp constant ae = 0 from the hydrostatic stress.
OK S y = σ y − Ph
Proportional
S z = σ z − Ph
φp constant -1 < ae < +1 Need ae The hydrostatic stress Ph
Multiaxial is an invariant:
The shear stresses are unchanged
Non-Proportional 1
φp may vary ae may vary Tricky Ph = (σ x + σ y + σ z )
Multiaxial
3
Decreasing
Confidence
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-24
YIELD CRITERIA VON MISES & TRESCA IN DEVIATORIC SPACE
When the stress state is not uniaxial, a yield point is not sufficient. A
multiaxial yield criterion is required. The most popular criterion is the von
S1
Mises yield criterion. All common yield theories assume that the
hydrostatic stress has no effect, ie., the yield criterion is a function of the von Mises
deviatoric stresses. The von Mises criterion - based on distortion energy -
can be expressed in terms of principal stresses: Tresca
2
σy
3σ y2
3
1 2 2 2
(S12 + S22 + S32 ) = 2
or
2
(σ 1 − σ 2 ) + (σ 2 − σ 3 ) + (σ 3 − σ 1 ) = σ y

An alternative, the Tresca Criterion can be expressed as: S2


S3
σ1 − σ 2 σ 2 − σ 3 σ 3 − σ1  σ y
τ max = max  , , =
 2 2 2  2
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-26

VON MISES & TRESCA IN PRINCIPALS


σ2

von Mises
Tresca
EQUIVALENT STRESS AND STRAIN
σ1 METHODS

Extension of the use of yield criteria to fatigue


under combined stresses

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-28
SOME EQUIVALENT STRESS/STRAIN CRITERIA S-N METHODS WITH EQUIVALENT STRESS
● Maximum Principal Stress σ 1 = σ eq
∆σ
● Basquin equation for uniaxial = σ ′f (2 N f )b
● Maximum Principal Strain ε1 = ε eq
2
σ1 − σ 3 σ eq
● Maximum Shear Stress (Tresca Criterion) = τ eq = ∆σ 1
= σ ′f (2 N f )
b
2 2
● Using (Abs) Max Principal 2
ε1 − ε 3 γ max (1 + ν )ε eq
● Shear Strain (Tresca) = =
2 2 2
1 ∆τ max σ′
(σ 1 − σ 2 ) 2 + ( σ 2 − σ 3 ) 2 + ( σ 3 − σ 1 ) 2 = f (2 N f ) b
● von Mises stress = σ eq ● Using Max Shear
2 2 2
1
● von Mises strain ( ε1 − ε 2 ) 2 + ( ε 2 − ε 3 ) 2 + ( ε 3 − ε1 ) 2 = ε eq
(1 + ν ) 2
∆σ VM
= σ ′f (2 N f ) b
ν eε e + ν pε p ● Using von Mises 2
Note that ν can be found from: ν=
εe + ε p
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-30

E-N METHODS WITH EQUIVALENT STRAIN


E-N METHODS WITH EQUIVALENT STRAIN
(CONT.)
'
● Coffin-Manson-Basquin ∆ε σ f ∆γ σ f
'

equation for uniaxial 2


=
E
2N f ( ) b
(
+ ε 'f 2 N f ) c
● Tresca criterion = (2 N f )b + (1 + ν p )ε 'f (2 N f )c
2 2G

'
∆ε 1 σ f
● Using (Abs) Max Principal 2
=
E
2N f ( ) b
( )
+ ε 'f 2 N f
c

● von Mises Criterion


∆γ (1 + ν e )σ 'f
= (2Nf )b + (1 + νp )ε'f (2Nf )c
2 E
'
∆γ τ f
● Adapted for Torsion 2
=
G
2N f ( ) b
(
+ γ 'f 2 N f ) c

∆γ 2(1 + ν e )σ 'f
● But if we assume the principal stress/strain criterion:
● which is the same as...
2
=
3E
(2N f ) b
+ 3 ε 'f 2 N f ( ) c

'
γ ∆γ σ f
σ 1 = τ and ε1 = , so
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
2 2
=
G
b
(
2 N f + 2ε 'f 2 N f
c
) ( ) PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-32
THE NEED FOR A SIGN COMMENTS ON EQUIVALENT STRAIN METHODS
250
Stress(MPa) maximum principal
Cylindrical
notched specimen -250
● Don’t account for the known fact that fatigue failure
0 1 2 3

with axial sine Stress(MPa) minimum principal


Seconds
occurs in specifically oriented planes.
loading 250

● These approaches “average” the stresses/strains to


obtain a failure criterion with no regard to the direction of
-250
0 1 2 3
Seconds

Stress(MPa) absolute maximum principal


Tension
250
crack initiation.
σ -250
0 1 2 3
Seconds
● Tresca and von Mises are not sensitive to the hydrostatic
250
Stress(MPa) von Mises stress stress or strain
τ
Compression
-250
0 1 2 3
● They don’t account for mean stresses
Seconds

250
Stress(MPa) maximum shear stress ● They don’t handle out-of-phase stresses or strains
σ
-250
0 1 2 3
Seconds

τ Screen 1

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-34

ASME PRESSURE VESSEL CODE SIMPLE METHODS FOR PROPORTIONAL LOADINGS

● This method is based on the concept of relative von Mises


Strain - equivalent to signed von Mises strain for
proportional loadings
● The ASME pressure vessel code uses the equivalent -1<a<0 a~0 0<a<1
strain parameter:
stress Absolute Absolute Absolute
 2  criterion Maximum Maximum Maximum
∆ε eq = MAX ( wrt . time)  (∆ε11 − ∆ε 22 ) + ( ∆ε 22 − ∆ε 33 ) + (∆ε 33 − ∆ε11 )
2 2 2
( 2
+ 6 ∆ε12 2
+ ∆ε 23 2
+ ∆ε 31 ) 
Principal Principal Principal
 3 

● No path dependence strain Absolute Any Tresca


● Non-conservative for non-proportional loading criterion Maximum
Principal
● No directionality
● Not sensitive to hydrostatic stress
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-36
NOTCH RULES FOR PROPORTIONAL LOADING KLANN-TIPTON-CORDES METHOD
First define cyclic stress-strain curve using the Ramberg-Osgood
● When the loading is no longer uniaxial, the uniaxial stress strain curve formula:
is no longer enough on its own 1 The ratio ε2/ε1 of the
σq  σq  n'
εq = +  principal strains is assumed
Ε  Κ'  to be constant in this case
● Two methods which address this problem:
● Klann, Tipton & Cordes Calculate the biaxiality ratio from :
● Hoffmann & Seeger ε2
+ v'
ε1
● Both these methods extend the use of the von Mises criterion to post a= ε
yield behaviour 1 + v' 2
ε1
Digitise the cyclic stress-strain curve and for each point calculate
● Both methods assume fixed principal axes and fixed ratio of stresses Poisson’s ratio from the equation :
or strains
1 1  σ
v' = −  − ve  q
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
2 2  Eε q
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-38

KLANN-TIPTON-CORDES METHOD (CONT.) MODIFIED STRESS-STRAIN CURVE PARAMETERS


It can be shown that the values of the principal strains and stresses can
be calculated from: ae = 1
1 − v' a 1 σ1
ε1=εq σ 1 =σ q ae = 0
2 2
1− a + a 1− a + a
Fit the following equation to the calculated modified parameters:
ae = -1
1
σ1 σ  n*
ε 1 = * +  1* 
Ε Κ 
The modified modulus is calculated explicitly from:
E
Ε*= ε1
1- ve a e
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-40
HOFFMAN-SEEGER METHOD HOFFMAN-SEEGER METHOD (CONT.)
Calculate von Mises equivalent strain from combined strain parameter
e.g. from: The other required stresses and strains are calculated from:
2
1 − a e +a e
ε q,e = ε 1,e
1 − a e ve ε2 v' (1 + a)
ε2 = ε 1  ε3 = εq σ = aσ
 ε1 1- a + a 2 2 1
The Neuber correction is then carried out on this formulation:

σ q ε q = Eε q,e 2
These can then be used to calculate any other
combined parameter e.g. signed Tresca

The effective Poisson’s ratio is calculated as for the Klann-Tipton-Cordes


Method, as are a, σ, ε1 and ε2/ ε1

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-42

EXTENDING NEUBER TO NON-PROPORTIONAL BUCZYNSKI-GLINKA NOTCH METHOD


LOADINGS
● This topic is important because it permits non-proportional
● The Neuber method is only suitable for uniaxial or
multiaxial fatigue life predictions to be made based on
proportional loadings
elastic FEA. Still being researched and not working
properly yet.
● Where the loading is non-proportional and the stress-
strain response is path dependent it must be replaced by
● The aim is to predict an average sort of elastic-plastic
an incremental version
stress-strain response from a pseudo-elastic stress or
strain history. σε = σ e ε e

● It is necessary to combine a multiaxial plasticity model with


an incremental formulation of a notch correction procedure σ ije ∆ε ije + ε ije ∆σ ije = σ ijN ∆ε ijN + ε ijN ∆σ ijN
and to make some other assumptions.
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-44
BUCZYNSKI-GLINKA NOTCH METHOD (CONT.) WHAT TO DO WHEN LOADING IS NOT UNIAXIAL
● For proportional loadings a different cyclic stress-strain curve is
● This rule has to be combined with a multiaxial plasticity required
model such as the Mroz-Garud model
● For non-proportional loadings, a 1-dimensional cyclic plasticity
● Additionally some assumptions are required, eg., that the model is no longer sufficient
ratios of the increments of strains, stresses or total strain
energy in certain directions are the same for the elastic as ● Neuber’s rule does not work for non-proportional loadings
the elastic-plastic case. Buczynski-Glinka uses total strain
energy ● Uniaxial rainflow counting doesn’t work for non-proportional loadings

● Simple combined stress-strain parameters do not predict damage


● One of these assumptions is necessary to be able to reach well
a solution of the equations
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-46

DIRECTIONALITY OF CRACK GROWTH DIRECTIONALITY OF CRACK GROWTH (CONT.)


● When the biaxiality ratio is negative (type A), the
maximum shear plane where cracks tend to initiate is
oriented as shown in the diagram (on next page)
● In the early stages of initiation, type A cracks grow mainly along
the surface in mode 2 (shear), before transitioning to Mode 1
normal to the maximum principal stress.

● When the biaxiality is positive (type B), the cracks tend to


be driven more through the thickness.
● These are therefore more damaging for the same levels of shear
strain.

● Uniaxial loading is a special case of type B.

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-47 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-48
CRACK INITIATION & MULTIAXIAL FATIGUE
CRACK INITIATION & MULTIAXIAL FATIGUE
(CONT.)
● Proportion of time spent in Stage I and II depends on:
● Crack Initiation demonstrated to be due to: ● Loading mode and amplitude
● Slip occurring along planes of maximum shear, starting in grains ● Material type (ductile vs brittle)
most favorably oriented with respect to the maximum applied shear
stress
● Crack initiation life refers to the time taken to develop an
● Stage I (nucleation & early growth) is confined to shear planes. engineering size crack and includes Stage I and II.
Here both shear and normal stress/strain control the crack growth
rate.
● Stage I or II may dominate life. In uniaxial case, the
controlling parameters in both stages are directly related
● Stage II crack growth occurs on planes oriented normal to the
maximum principal stress. Here the magnitude of the maximum
to the uniaxial stress or strain. But NOT so in multi-axial
principal stress and strain dominates crack growth. case.

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-49 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-50

CRACK INITIATION & MULTIAXIAL FATIGUE


MULTIAXIAL ANALYSIS IN MSC FATIGUE
(CONT.) (a) Torsion (b) Tension

γ σ1ε
● For non-proportional loading, the “critical planes” vary *
vary with time.

● Cracks growing on a particular plane may impede the γ γ


progress of cracks growing on a different plane. σ1ε

● Shear Strain on the plane of maximum shear will extend the fatigue
● Multi-axial fatigue theory for non-proportional loading, crack
MUST attempt, to a greater or lesser extent, to ● Progress will be opposed by the friction between the crack faces
incorporate some of the above observations, to have ● The separation of the cracked faces due to the presence of the normal
any chance of success in real situations. strains in case b, will eliminate friction. Consequently the crack tip
experiences all the applied shear load. Hence this case is more
damaging.
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-51 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-52
MULTIAXIAL ANALYSIS IN MSC FATIGUE (CONT.) MULTIAXIAL ANALYSIS IN MSC FATIGUE (CONT.)
● Critical Plane Approach: ● Four Planar Approaches:
● Recognising that fatigue damage (cracking) is directional ● Normal Strain
● Smith-Watson-Topper-Bannantine
● Considers accumulation of damage on particular planes
● Shear Strain
● Fatemi-Socie
● Typically damage is considered at all possible planes say @ 15
degree intervals, and the worst (critical) plane selected.
● Two complex Rainflow Counting Methods:
● Employs variations on the Brown-Miller Approach: ● Wang-Brown
∆γ ● Wang-Brown with Mean Stress Correction
+ ∆Σn = C
2
● Equivalent fatigue life results for equivalent values of the
● Dang-Van Total Life Factor of Safety Method
material constant, C
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-53 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-54

NORMAL STRAIN METHOD SHEAR STRAIN METHOD

● Critical Plane Approach ● Critical Plane Approach


● Calculates the Normal Strain time history and damage on multiple ● Calculates the Shear Strain time history and damage on multiple
planes planes
● Fatigue results reported on the worst plane ● Fatigue results reported on the worst plane
● Fatigue damage based on Normal Strain range ● Fatigue damage based on Shear Strain range
● No mean stress correction ● No mean stress correction

● Use with Type ‘A’ cracks ● Use with Type ‘B’ cracks

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-55 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-56
SMITH-TOPPER-WATSON-BANNANTINE METHOD FATEMI-SOCIE METHOD
● Critical Plane Approach
● Critical Plane Approach
● Calculates the Shear Strain time history and damage on
● Calculates the Normal Strain time history and damage on multiple planes
multiple planes
● Fatigue results reported on the worst plane
● Fatigue results reported on the worst plane
● Fatigue damage based on Shear Strain range
● Fatigue damage based on Normal Strain range
● Includes a mean stress correction based on Maximum Normal
● Includes a mean stress correction based on Maximum Normal stress
stress
● Requires a material constant ‘n’

● Use with Type ‘A’ cracks


● Use with Type ‘B’ cracks

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-57 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-58

SUMMARY OF CRITICAL PLANE DAMAGE


WANG-BROWN METHOD
MODELS
∆ε n σ ′f b c
● Normal Strain:
2
=
E
2N f ( ) + ε ′f 2 N f ( ) ● A complex recursive multi-axial rainflow counting
method
2
∆ε n σ ′f 2b b+ c
● SWT – Bannantine: 2
⋅ σ n,max =
E
( 2N )f + σ ′f ⋅ ε ′f 2 N f ( )
● A mean stress correction method is available

∆γ (1 + ν e )σ ′f b c ● May be quite slow especially for long loading histories


● Shear Strain:
2
=
E
2N f ( ) + (1 + ν )ε ′ ( 2N ) p f f

● Recommended for a variety of proportional and non-


∆γ  σ  (1 + ν e ) n(1 + ν e )σ ′f 2
● Fatemi-Socie: 1 + n n,max  =
  σ ′f 2 N f( )
b
+ ( 2N ) f
2b
proportional loadings
2  σ y  E 2 Eσ y

( ) (
+ 1 + ν p ε ′f 2 N f )
c
+
( )
n 1 + ν p ε ′f σ ′f
( 2N )
b+ c
f
2σ y
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-59 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-60
WANG-BROWN METHOD (CONT.) WANG-BROWN METHOD (CONT.)
● Calculates a different critical plane for each
rainflow reversal Mean Stress Correction using mean Normal Stress:

● For each reversal the damage is calculated ) γ max + S .δε n σ ′f − 2.σ n,mean b c
on the critical (maximum shear plane) ε≡
1 + ν ′ + S (1 − ν ′ )
=
E
(
2N f ) (
+ ε ′f 2 N f )
whether case A or B

● Uses Normal Strain range, Maximum Shear


strain

● Requires material parameter ‘S’


PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-61 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-62

EXAMPLE OF POLAR DAMAGE PLOT EXAMPLE: NON-PROPORTIONAL LOADING


Polar Plot of Data : DEMO
Theta=90 Theta=45

90 Multiaxial Method Life


120 60 (Repeats)
Example: Steering Knuckle
(Workshop 10) Normal Strain 106,000
150 30
At Node 1045: STW-Bannantine 316,000
Max. Stress Range = 508 MPa Shear Strain 18,500
180 0 Mean Biaxiality Ratio: -0.6
1E-9
1E-8
1E-7
1E-6
Fatemi-Socie 27,000
Most Popular Angle = -64 deg
Wang-Brown 30,500
Angle Spread = 90 deg
210 330 Wang-Brown + Mean 26,000

Abs. Max. Principal Strain 97,300


240 300
270

Polar Plot of Type A and Type B damage for W ang-Brown Method

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-63 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-64
EXAMPLE: OUT-OF-PHASE LOADING DANG-VAN METHOD

● High-cycle fatigue applications designed for infinite life


Multiaxial Method Life
(Cycles)

Material: Manten Normal Strain 4.12E+07 ● Calculates factor-of-safety of the design


Axial Stress, σx = 25 ksi STW-Bannantine 2.80E+04
Shear Strain 1.41E+05
Shear Stress, τxy = 14.4 ksi
● Uses S-N total life method
Fatemi-Socie 1.70E+05
Wang-Brown 6.63E+06
Wang-Brown + Mean 8.55E+05 ● Applications:
Abs. Max. Principal Strain 2.88E+07
● Bearing design
Signed von Mises Strain 2.88E+07
● Vibration induced fatigue
Signed Tresca Strain 8.41E+06

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-65 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-66

DANG-VAN CRITERION DANG-VAN CRITERION (CONT.)


● The Dang Van criterion is a fatigue limit criterion Fatigue damage occurs if:

τ ( t ) + a ⋅ ph( t ) − b ≥ 0
● It is based on the premise that there is plasticity on a
microscopic level before shakedown
where τ(t) and ph(t) are the maximum microscopic shear
stress and the hydrostatic stress at time t in the
● After shakedown the important factors for fatigue are the stabilised state. They can be calculated from:
amplitude of the microscopic shear stresses and the
magnitude of the hydrostatic stress 1
1
{
τ ( t ) = Tresca Sij ( t ) + devρij*
2
} ph( t ) = ( )
σ + σ yy + σ zz (t )
3 xx
● The method has a complicated way of estimating the
microscopic residual stress “a” and “b” are material properties
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-67 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-68
DANG-VAN CRITERION (CONT.) DANG-VAN PLOT

● The parameter “b” is the shear stress amplitude at the


fatigue limit τ(t) Damage
occurs here !!!
● The parameter “a” is in effect the mean stress τ + a ⋅ ph − b = 0
sensitivity, with the mean stress being represented by
the hydrostatic stress
ph(t)
● dev ρij* is the deviatoric part of the stabilised residual τ − a ⋅ ph +b = 0
stress

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-69 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-70

STABILIZED RESIDUAL STRESSES SUMMARY OF DANG-VAN CRITERION

(
ρ * devρ * ij
) ● Is a high-cycle fatigue criterion (infinite fatigue life)
● The stabilised local residual stresses are calculated by
means of an iteration in which convergence assumes a ● Can deal with three-dimensional loading
stabilised state (a state of elastic shakedown).
● Can deal with general multiaxial loading
● As the loading sequence is repeated, the “yield surface”
grows and moves with a combination of kinematic and
● Works at the microstructural level, ie, the scale of one or
isotropic hardening until it stabilises
two grains

● The stabilised yield surface is a 9-dimensional


● Can identify the direction of crack initiation
hypersphere that encompasses the loading history
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-71 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-72
DANG-VAN FACTOR OF SAFETY PLOT SUMMARY OF MULTIAXIAL APPROACH
● Assume uniaxial and find critical locations

● Assess multiaxiality at critical locations by checking biaxiality ratio


and angle of max. principal stress vs time

● If angle constant and constant ae < 0, use Hoffman-Seeger (or


Klann-Tipton-Cordes) correction with Abs. Max. Principal stress

● If angle constant and constant ae > 0, use Hoffman-Seeger


correction and signed Tresca stress

● If ae or angle varies greatly with time, need to use critical plane


method
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-73 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-74

EXAMPLE MULTIAXIAL ASSESSMENT EXAMPLE MULTIAXIAL ASSESSMENT (CONT.)

Perform crack 12 loads associated


initiation analysis with 12 FE results
of a knuckle.
Multiple (12)
loading inputs.
Force(Newtons) LOAD03.PVX
84.71
Sample = 1
Assess Npts = 1610
Max Y = 84.71

multiaxiality. -50.05
0 500 1000 1500
point
Min Y = -50.05

Force(Newtons) LOAD02.PVX
7720
Sample = 1
Npts = 1610
Max Y = 7720
Min Y = -7998
-7998
0 500 1000 1500
point

Force(Newtons) LOAD01.PVX
3769
Sample = 1
Npts = 1610
Max Y = 3769
Min Y = -2654
-2654
0 500 1000 1500
point

Screen 1
PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-75 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-76
EXAMPLE MULTIAXIAL ASSESSMENT (CONT.) EXAMPLE MULTIAXIAL ASSESSMENT (CONT.)

Angle Spread

Mean Biaxiality

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-77 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-78

WORKSHOP

● Perform “Workshop 10: Multiaxial Assessment”


from MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide
● Part 1: You will assess the multiaxiality

● Part 2: You will perform multiaxial fatigue analyses

● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you


don’t understand

PAT318, Section 19, September 2008 PAT318, Section 19, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-79 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S19-80
SECTION 20
FATIGUE OF WELDED STRUCTURES

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-2

EFFECT OF WELDING ON DURABILITY EFFECT OF WELDING ON DURABILITY (CONT.)


Weld toe
● The fatigue properties of a welded joint are completely
different from those of the parent plate because of:
● Fairly sharp and ill-controlled geometric features
● Defects such as slag inclusions
● Residual stresses (usually unknown)
● Heat affected zone
Parent material Fusion zone Heat affected zone
● Fatigue properties of welds in a range of steels have
much less variation than in the parent plate

Seam weld in a tube,


showing grain structure

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-4
EFFECT OF WELDING ON DURABILITY (CONT.)
● Welds generally coincide S-N Data Plot

with geometric features, classF


SRI1: 1.201E4 b1: -0.3333 b2: -0.2 E: 2.07E5 UTS: 500
BS4360-50D
changes in section, etc SRI1: 1903 b1: -0.123 b2: 0 E: 1.914E5 UTS: 480

1E3
● The fatigue strength of
welded joints is in

(M P a )
general much less than SPOT WELD FATIGUE
that of the “parent plate”

S tr e s s R a n g e
1E2

● Even in well-designed
welded structures, the
welds are the most likely
failure locations 1E1
1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6
Life (Cycles)
1E7 1E8

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-6

MOTIVATION FOR SPOT WELD ANALYSIS STRUCTURAL STRESS-BASED (LBF) METHOD


( Rupp - Storzel - Grubisic )
● About 50% of automotive structural durability problems
● Coarse mesh, with spot welds
are associated with spot-welds modeled as stiff beam elements
Spotweld “Nugget”
● About 80% of automotive body durability problems are ● Beams are used as “force
associated with spot-welds transducers” to obtain forces and d
moments transmitted through the
● The tooling cost for one spot weld on an automated spot welds
production line is about $30,000 ● Forces and moments in the beams
● Late additions may cost twice this amount are used to calculate “structural
stresses”, around the edge of the
● Besides any structural importance, the durability of spot Shell Beam Element
weld spot Elements
welds can have an important effect on perceived quality,
● Life is calculated using Miner's rule d
ie, squeaking and rattling
● Method is generally applicable and
can handle multiaxial loads
PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-8
AUTOMOTIVE PART WITH SPOT WELDS FATIGUE ANALYSIS WITH SPOT WELDS

Geometry
(Beam Elements)

Loading Fatigue Analysis Post


(Time History) (Spot Weld Analyzer) Processing

Material
(Weld S-N Data)

Optimization
& Testing

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-10

EXAMPLE LOAD HISTORY ON A DAMPER STRUCTURAL STRESS CALCULATIONS


The structural stresses are calculated from the
forces and moments on each beam element :

My

My
Fy
My
Fy
Fz
Fy
Fx
Fz
Fz
Fx Mx
Fx Mx
Sheet 1
Mx
Weld Nugget
Sheet 2
Vertical Loads on Damper Mounting
PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-12
STRUCTURAL STRESS CALCULATIONS (CONT.) S-N CURVE DETERMINATION
Stresses in sheet : ● Specimens tested include H-shear
(shown), H-peel, hat-profile, etc.
Fx, y Fz ● Specimens must be modelled and
σ r ,max = My
analysed to determine structural
π ds stress for S-N curves
Fy ● S-N data falls in single scatter band
Fz for sheet failure
σr = 1744
. Fx
s2 Mx ● Nugget failure is rare (under- S-N Data Plot

s dimensioned welds) spot_nugget_generic


SRI1: 2100 b1: -0.1667 b2: -0.09091 E: 2.1E5 UTS: 500
spot_sheet_generic

M x, y ● 3 sheet welds handled by treating SRI1: 2900 b1: -0.1667 b2: -0.09091 E: 2.1E5 UTS: 500

σ r ,max = 1872
. 2
as 2 welds and ignoring middle
1E4

ds d sheet failure

Stress Range (MPa)


● Stresses vary as a function of angle 1E3

● Similar equations for stresses in nugget


● Corrections made for size effect
1E2
1E2 1E3 1E4 1E5 1E6 1E7 1E8
PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 Life (Cycles)
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-14

EFFECT OF WELDING ON MATERIAL LIFE PREDICTION OF SPOT WELDED STRUCTURES


PROPERTIES
Spot Weld Load-Life Curves FE - Model
Fz
Analytical model
Mx
● When steels of widely My
Fy
differing grades are F(t), M(t)
Fx
welded, the resulting
S-N curves tend to fall MBD
model σ(θ,t)
within a single scatter
band
● Therefore generic
δx(t) Post
Post--processing
curves are suitable for
most purposes nugget
sheet metal
Damage calculation

R=0
PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-16
GENERAL PROBLEMS WITH MODELLING SPOT WELDS MODELLING SPOT WELDS WITH CWELD

● Inconvenient meshing (node-to-node matching) ● Spot welds can also be


modelled using:
● Model stiffness is a little too low
● Nastran CWELD elements
● HEX elements linked by MPC
● Requires different models for durability, NVH, etc.
equations

● Method rather pessimistic for high loads (when plastic Both give improved stiffness
deformation is significant) and do not require congruent
mesh on flanges

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-18

SPOT WELD DAMAGE CALCULATION PROCEDURE POSTPROCESSING SPOT WELD RESULTS

● Stresses and fatigue damage are calculated at 10


intervals around the spot weld for the 2 sheets and the ● Listing the results files, life, damage, crack location, etc...
nugget
● Stress histories are calculated from : ● Plotting in Patran (Insight)

σk ● Polar plotting of damage


σ (t) = ∑ P Pk(t)
k
● “What if ?” scenarios ...
where k = static loadcase ID, or results from transient FEA
● Life is calculated using Linear Damage Summation
(Miner's Rule)
PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-20
EXAMPLE FATIGUE RESULTS FOR SHOCK TOWER EXAMPLE POLAR PLOT OF FATIGUE DAMAGE

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-22

EXAMPLE: SPOT WELD ANALYSIS EXAMPLE: SPOT WELD ANALYSIS (CONT.)


Perform spot weld analysis of shock tower with multiple load inputs

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-24
EXAMPLE: SPOT WELD ANALYSIS (CONT.) EXAMPLE: SPOT WELD ANALYSIS (CONT.)

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-26

EXAMPLE: SPOT WELD ANALYSIS (CONT.)

SEAM WELD FATIGUE

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-28
VOLVO/CHALMERS/NCODE METHOD MODELLING WELDS
● Designed and validated for thin sheet automotive tB

structures (1-3 mm sheet thickness)


sheet B
E (i)
● Based on structural stress at weld toe σ⊥Β
E (j)

tA
● Simple shell meshing rules σ⊥Α

effective throat, a sheet A

● Differentiates between “flexible” and “stiff” joints


● Sheets and welds modelled predominantly with 4-noded shells
● Sheets described by mean surfaces
● Thickness of weld elements equals effective throat, or about 2x sheet thickness
● Element length of about 5 mm
● Small radii not modelled

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-30

DAMAGE PARAMETER (STRESS) DEFINITION S-N CURVE DETERMINATION


● Different specimen geometries are tested
Damage parameter is principal
● FE-models must be built to calculate stress
stress at weld toe, based on weld
toe elements. ● Results fall on 2 curves depending on the
nature of the joint
Use Nastran with options:
STRESS,CUBIC
PARAM, SNORM, 55
Stresses are unaveraged

Stress is determined based on the nodal


displacements and rotations of the weld toe elements
PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-32
“FLEXIBLE” AND “STIFF” JOINTS EXAMPLE: SEAM WELD FATIGUE

σb
r = -------------------------- = = 0≤r≤ 1
σb + σn

Flexible Stiff

● Bending ratio r is calculated based on top and bottom surface stresses


● Flexible joints have more bending at weld toe, and high values of r
● S-N curve is selected based on values of r
● Stiff joints have lower fatigue strength

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-34

EXAMPLE: SEAM WELD FATIGUE (CONT.) EXAMPLE: SEAM WELD FATIGUE (CONT.)

PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-36
SUMMARY WORKSHOP

● Perform “Workshop 11: Welding” from MSC


Fatigue Quick Start Guide
● Part 1: You will perform a spot weld fatigue analysis

● Part 2: You will perform a seam weld fatigue analysis

● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you


don’t understand
● Initial results are positive
● Predictions on real components tend to be with a factor of 2 or 3
● Mainly conservative
PAT318, Section 20, September 2008 PAT318, Section 20, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S20-38
SECTION 21
SOFTWARE STRAIN GAUGE

PAT318, Section 21, September 2008 PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-2

OVERVIEW SOFTWARE STRAIN GAUGE


● A Finite Element tool allowing the creation of stress and
A virtual test facility in the strain time histories at arbitrary locations on a Finite
MSC Fatigue environment Element Model surface

● Uses:
● Finite Element Model Results Verification
● Comparison of Strain Values with Test Time Histories

● Previous FEA techniques have only permitted comparison


of single stress or strain values.

PAT318, Section 21, September 2008 PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-4
DESCRIPTION CORRELATION APPLICATIONS
● A virtual strain gauge on a finite element model. DISPLAY OF SIGNAL: SAETRN.DAC

● Allows correlation between 1000


17081 points.

9 pts/Secs

Displayed:

theoretical calculations with 4501 points.

● This gauge can produce theoretical time histories from


from pt 1

Full file data:

experimentally determined

Strain (uE)
multiple time varying applied loads
Max = 999

at 0

results.
Min = -495

at 1743

Mean = 385.3

● Permits greater confidence in


S.D. = 235

● Time histories may be extracted at any point on the mesh -600


0
Time (Secs)
500
RMS = 451.3

surface the finite element model of the


real world structure. CYCLE HISTOGRAM DISTRIBUTION FOR : SAETRN.CYO

● Results based on either standard or user defined strain


Maximum height : 16 Z Units :

● Stress / Strain results may be


gauge definitions. subsequently analysed as:
16

● Cycle Counts Cycles

● Results can be extracted from static, transient or quasi


Z-Axis

0 999

● PSD results
0

static finite element loading.


Mean
Range uE
uE Y-Axis
X-Axis
1508.9 -495

● Damage / Life Values


PAT318, Section 21, September 2008 PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-6

CORRELATION APPLICATIONS (CONT.) WELDED STRUCTURE ANALYSIS


● The Software Strain Gauge is also of benefit to the
analyst performing MSC Fatigue weld durability
calculations in accordance with British Standard 7608.

● When calculating fatigue life for welded structures the


Software loading direction is of importance.
Strain
Gauges
Real World Structure FEA Model Surface ● The strain gauge allows extraction of time histories
prior to rainflow cycle counting in specific directions on
Hub Strain

an FEA structure
Hub Strain

time
PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation
time PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation
S21-7 S21-8
WELDED STRUCTURE ANALYSIS (CONT.) GAUGE DEFINITION
● The gauges are defined as FEA groups, each containing
The Gauge tool allows access to strain time histories at the weld between 1 to 3 elements.
toe, providing important information for weld durability calculations.

● Standard gauge definitions:


Software
Strain Gauges ● Uni-axial Gauges
● T Gauges
● Delta Gauges
● Rectangular Gauges
● Planar and stacked formulations.

● User defined gauges may also be created


Real World Structure FEA Model
● definitions stored in a gauge definition file.
CLASS F WELD DETAIL (BS7608)
PAT318, Section 21, September 2008 PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-10

IMPLEMENTATION EXAMPLE: SOFTWARE STRAIN GAUGE


● Gauge position:
● Anywhere on the FEA model surface
● Any orientation Introduce software
strain gage as a
● Covering multiple finite elements.
correlation tool on a
mounting lug.
● Gauge results:
● Averaged results from the underlying finite elements Multiple loading
● Replicates the geometric averaging with actual instrumentation. inputs.
● Transformed to the coordinate system and alignment of the
software strain gauge.

● Up to 200 simultaneous Software Strain Gauges


PAT318, Section 21, September 2008 PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-12
EXAMPLE: SOFTWARE STRAIN GAUGE (CONT) EXAMPLE: SOFTWARE STRAIN GAUGE (CONT)

and elements
Define node
that define the
to initially put
surface
gauge on ...

PAT318, Section 21, September 2008 PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-14

EXAMPLE: SOFTWARE STRAIN GAUGE (CONT) CORRELATION TECHNIQUES

● Define material and loading ● Overlays and cross plots


● Rosette analysis
● Extract time histories from rosette ● Single location uniaxial life analyzer
● Single location multiaxial life analyzer
● Perform rosette analysis and
correlation

PAT318, Section 21, September 2008 PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-16
WORKSHOP

● Perform “Workshop 13: Software Strain Gauge”


from MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide

● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you


don’t understand

PAT318, Section 21, September 2008 PAT318, Section 21, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S21-18
SECTION 22
VIBRATION FATIGUE

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-2

FATIGUE FOR DYNAMIC LOADING CHOICE OF ANALYSIS DOMAIN

● All fatigue analyses require cycles of stress and/or strain ● Time-domain:


to be identified. ● Static method (with or without “inertia relief”)
● Fortunately, this does not always require a transient ● Transient method (Direct or Modal)
dynamic analysis.
● Options: ● Frequency-domain:
● Static (or pseudo-static) ● Frequency Response Analysis (Transfer Function Method)
● fatigue analysis scales static stress or strain tensor by time histories ● Random Vibration Analysis
● Transient (direct or modal)
● fatigue analysis uses stress or strain data from dynamic FEA results
● Random Vibration (frequency domain PSD of stress)
● fatigue analysis converts PSD to expected cycles of stress

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-4
IS DYNAMIC RESPONSE CALCULATION NECESSARY?
QUASI-STATIC ANALYSIS
● Yes, if the highest possible frequency of loading is
frequency.
greater than one third of the 1st natural frequency. ● Identify set of static FE loadcases and
constraints to simulate service environment
Transfer
function ● Measure or predict loading histories Pk( t )
FL < 1/3 FN
● Elastic stress histories calculated from linear
superposition:

 σ ij ,e , k 
σ ij ,e (t ) = ∑ Pk (t ) 

frequency k P
 k , fea 

FL Fn where k = loadcase ID
Highest 1stnatural
loading frequency
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 frequency PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-6

QUASI-STATIC METHOD (LINEAR SUPERPOSITION) STATIC ANALYSIS


Load Time
Histories - repeat for ● Advantages:
each ● Computationally cheap for FE analysis.
L1 L2 node/element ● Minimizes disk space requirements.
● Enables same stress data to be used for different loading events
for fatigue analysis. (ie, multiple events)
● Auto-elimination can be used to select entities prior to fatigue
σ1A* L1(t) + σ2A* L2(t) + ... = σA(t) analysis to speed up analysis.

Local Stress ● Disadvantages:


L1=1 Histories
● Static FE analysis requires some kind of constraint which can be
L2=1 unrealistic.
σA ● Insufficient accuracy where the natural frequencies of the system
are close to the frequency content of the loading.
Stress for Unit Load Cases
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-8
TRANSIENT ANALYSIS (TIME DOMAIN) TYPES OF TRANSIENT ANALYSIS
Local Stress Histories
Load Time Histories
● Direct (Integration) Transient Methods
L1 σA ● Equations of motion of the complete system must be integrated
through each time step
L1 ● Expensive (in both CPU Time, and Disk Space)
● Enable non-linear dynamic problems to be solved

L2 L2
● Modal (Superposition) Transient Methods
● Dynamics and degrees of freedom of system are reduced to a set
Fatigue Analysis
Stress for combined loads of modes and therefore much quicker to solve than direct method.
calculated by FE point by point. ● Requires an appropriate set of modes to be selected.
● Restricted to linear problems (and commonly used)
For long time histories, issues with solution
time and disk space requirements
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-10

CONCEPT OF MODAL SUPERPOSITIONING TRANSIENT USING MODAL SUPERPOSITION


Modal Responses
Mode Modal
Shapes Coordinates r1 r2 - repeat for each
Mode 1 node/element
Mode 1 × 1.5

Mode 2 × 1.0 + Mode 2


φ1A* r1(t) + φ2A* r2(t) + ... = σA(t)
Mode 1
Mode 3 × 2.0 + Mode 3
Local Stress Histories

σA
Response Mode 2
Stress for Mode Shapes
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-12
MODAL SUPERPOSITION TRANSIENT ANALYSIS
Calculate Modal Stresses (using Calculate modal responses using ● Advantages:
Nastran SOL 103) Modal Transient Analysis (Nastran
SOL 112, SDISP(punch) = ALL) ● Includes dynamic effects where the natural frequencies of the
system are close to the frequency content of the loading.
Mode 3
● Systems can be analysed dynamically without any artificial
0.5
0.4
Mode 3 constraints.
0.3
0.2 ● Modal transient is less computationally intensive than direct
0.1
0 transient.
-0.1
-0.2
-0.3
-0.4
-0.5
● Disadvantages:
Mode 4
● Transient is more computationally intensive than static analysis.
0.015

● Disk space requirements very large to store stress state at each


Mode 4
0.01

0.005 time step .


0
● Each loading event is a separate analysis.
-0.005

-0.01
● Cannot easily locate, critical elements, before fatigue analysis.
-0.015

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-14

TRANSIENT USING MODAL SUPERPOSITION ADVANTAGES OF MODAL SUPERPOSITION TRANSIENT

● The practical method of performing a modal transient ● Enables the dynamic response of the structure to be
analysis for fatigue is to combine modal stress and simulated without the disadvantage of storing the transient
modal responses within MSC Fatigue. response for each node/element of the model.
● Resonant Effects Accounted

● This is computationally identical to the procedure ● Method Is Analogous to the Quasi-Static Approach-Modal
performed within Nastran and has several advantages Participation Factors Associated With Modal Stresses
including reduced disk space. ● Used in combination with Multi Body Dynamics solution
(MDB) allows effective transient analysis of full
assemblies

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-16
DISADVANTAGES OF MODAL SUPERPOSITION
TRANSIENT

● Requires judicious choice of number of modes in the


Normal Modes analysis. Use of Residual Vector option in
Nastran is recommended
FATIGUE IN THE FREQUENCY DOMAIN
● Requires appropriate translation of modal responses into
time history format. Currently supported for Nastran using
SDISP from punch file

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-18

BENEFITS OF FATIGUE ANALYSIS


WHY USE FREQUENCY DOMAIN?
IN FREQUENCY DOMAIN
Time Domain
● Analyse structures with dynamic responses to random
loading without requiring full transient analysis
Wind speed

Hub Stress

● Fatigue analysis is relatively rapid


● Analysis can be included much earlier in the design
time
time cycle
Frequency Domain ● Ability to analyse ‘what if’ scenarios interactively
Input Output

Transfer
Function
frequency frequency
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-20
TIME TRANSIENT OR FREQUENCY DOMAIN? RANDOM VIBRATION (PSD STRESS)

Frequency domain analysis can account for dynamic (resonant) effects Load PSD Inputs Local Stress PSD

g^2/Hz σ^2/Hz
Time Domain
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) L1
(throw away phases)
Response variation

5 10 15 20 Response2
Hertz
g^2/Hz L2 Probability Density
Time in seconds
(Dirlik or Narrow Band)

Power Spectrum
Stress PSD response for combined
Fatigue Analysis
PSD loads calculated by FEA for
each frequency of interest.
Inverse Fourier Transform (IFT) Frequency (Hz)

(create random phases)


Frequency Domain
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-22

VIBRATION FATIGUE RANDOM VIBRATION (PSD STRESS)


● Resolution of stresses onto Principal planes
● Multi input loads ● Advantages
● Correlation effects using Cross PSD’s ● Suitable for loading that can be described by PSD (random,
stationary and Gaussian loading) i.e. wind gusts and sea states.
● Stress tensor stationarity checks
In p u t Also simulating PSD shaker tests
L oads
● Calculate fatigue life from PSDs
● Includes dynamic and resonant effects
C o n s tr u ct F E m od e l a n d ● Uses 7 solution methods including; Dirlik,
d e sig n a te in p u t a n d o u tp u t ● More efficient for these types of problems than simulating a very
n od es Steinberg and Narrow Band solutions long time history with a transient analysis

-5
x 10 ● Disadvantages
G xx G xz 
p ( 2 .5

G xy Ra
ng 2

 
e , 1 .5

● Underlining hypothesis (Gaussian, Stochastic, Ergodic)


Me
1

G xy G yy G yz  a n)
0 .5
0

G xz G z z 
200 400
400 200

 G yz 600
R a nge [ M P a ]
800 -20 0
0
Mean [MPa]

C a lcu late 6 com p o n e n t C h oo s e s tr e ss p ara m eter a n d


s tr e ss e s at e a ch o u tp u t n o d e C h e ck statio n arity o f th e co m p u te P S D o f stre s s at e a ch
a n d co m p u te th e p r in cip al p r in cip al a x es o u tp u t n o d e
s tr e ss e s

F a tig u e L ife
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-24
SUMMARY
HOW DO WE CALCULATE DAMAGE?

Hot spot
Disk CPU detection
Method Space Difficulties? Loading
Time before
analysis (PSD)

Static Realistic constraints,


Small Quick OK
no dynamic effects Material Post
Fatigue Analysis
(S-N curve) (Vibration Fatigue) Processing
Transient Medium-
Large Difficult Mode selection
(Modal) Slow

MBD Modal Geometry


Medium Medium OK Model Reduction (FE Model)
Superposition

Assumptions of
Vibration (PSD) Medium Medium Difficult stationary, random
Optimization
loading & Testing

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-26

HOW DO WE CALCULATE DAMAGE (CONT.)? WHAT DOES AN FFT TELL US?


Magnitude of FFT
TIME DOMAIN STRESS
TIME RAINFLOW RANGE
Steady COUNT
HISTORY HISTOGRAM Time history
state Area of spike =

|FFT|
or amplitude of sin
FATIGUE
Transient LIFE A wave
Analysis STRESS FFT
RANGE ω frequency
HISTOGRAM time
ϕ
FATIGUE
FREQUENCY DOMAIN LIFE
Argument of FFT
PSD PDF
FATIGUE
MODELLER Single sinusoidal eddy of The argument of the FFT gives
Transfer
frequency ω, amplitude A the phase angle ϕ of the
M0

Function M1
BLACK
FATIGUE and initial phase angle ϕ sinusoidal wave
M2 BOX LIFE
M
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 4 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-28
WHAT DOES AN FFT TELL US (CONT.)? WHAT IS A PSD?

● The FFT is a complex number given with respect to In a PSD we are only interested in the amplitude of each sine wave and are
frequency. not concerned with the phase relationships between the waves.

def 1
● A sine wave of frequency ω, amplitude A and initial phase Definition PSD = 2T |FFT|2
angle ϕ is represented in the frequency domain by a spike
occurring at ω along the frequency axis. The area under each spike
represents the Mean Square of the
sine wave at that frequency

PSD
● If the magnitude of the complex FFT is plotted, then the area under
the spike is found to be the amplitude A of the sine wave. When the We cannot determine what the
argument of the complex FFT is plotted then the area is found to be phase relationships between the
initial phase angle ϕ of the sine wave. frequency
waves are any more
PSD
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-30

MOMENTS OF A PSD EXPECTED ZEROS, PEAKS


& IRREGULARITY FACTOR

m
n=∫f ⋅G
n
( fd ∑
) f= fn⋅
G ( f) ⋅f δ
0
These statistical parameters are needed
In practice, for subsequent fatigue analyses:
m0, m1, m2 and m4
fk are sufficient to m
(Stress)2 E[0] = m 2
compute all of the
0
Hz information required
(Stress)2 fk
for the subsequent
fatigue analysis Hz
m4
E[P] = m2
Gk(f)
Gk(f) E[0] m 22
γ= =
Frequency, Hz E[P] m 0⋅ m4
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Frequency, Hz
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-31 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-32
EXAMPLE: EXPECTED ZEROS, PEAKS & PDF’S – PROBABILITY DENSITY FUNCTIONS
IRREGULARITY FACTOR
To get pdf from rainflow
Number of upward zero crossings: p(S)
histogram divide each
Time History bin height by
E[0] = 3
x x
Stress (MPa)

x x Number of peaks: P(Si)


S t × dS
x x E[P] = 6 S t = total number of cycles
time dS
dS = bin width
Stress Range (S)

Irregularity factor:
1 second
E[0] The probability of the stress range occurring between:
= upward zero crossing γ= = 3
x = peak E[P] 6 dS dS
Si − and S i + = P ( Si ). ds
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 2 2
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-33 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-34

DIRLIK SOLUTION OTHER SOLUTION METHODS

The best method in most cases


Dirlik

where:
Chaudhury
& Dover
Wirsching Hancock } Developed for
offshore use

Steinberg Tunna Railway


engineering
(UK)
A widely applicable solution developed after extensive Monte Carlo
simulation of a wide range of likely stress response conditions Electronic Narrow Band The original solution
components (USA)
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-35 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-36
SUMMARY OF FEATURES PROCESS ALTERNATIVES
● Calculate fatigue life from PSDs
● Uses 7 solution methods including; ● Use Nastran to calculate PSD’s of stress and use directly in
Dirlik, Steinberg and Narrow Band MSC Fatigue
solutions ● Disadvantage: Only basic stress components available as output
● Ability to handle multiple, partial and DISPLAY OF NOISE.PSD (no principals, etc.)
fully correlated loads
8E-5

● Mean Stress Correction ● Use Nastran to calculate complex transfer function between

RMS Power (Volts^2. Hz^)


● Palmgren-Miner Linear Damage inputs and stress results. MSC Fatigue combines transfer
● Material and Component S-N function with input PSD’s and cross spectra to calculate
● Model Surface Conditions 0
principal stresses vs frequency
0 1500
Frequency (Hz.)
● Factor of Safety Analysis nCode nSoft
● Disadvantage: More data for MSC Fatigue to process.
● Biaxiality Indicators

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-37 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-38

EXAMPLE: VIBRATION FATIGUE EXAMPLE: VIBRATION FATIGUE (CONT.)


Time Domain Analysis
Frequency Domain Analysis
(static FE result)
(at frequency = 0 Hz)
Example of vibration
fatigue analysis of a
bracket. Frequency-domain Analysis
Three load inputs. (one of several frequencies)

Critical area: around


circular hole.
Using transfer
function method of
vibration fatigue

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-39 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-40
EXAMPLE: VIBRATION FATIGUE (CONT.) EXAMPLE: VIBRATION FATIGUE (CONT.)
Time Domain Loading Setup Frequency Domain Loading Setup

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-41 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-42

EXAMPLE: VIBRATION FATIGUE (CONT.) EXAMPLE: VIBRATION FATIGUE RESULTS


Loading Setup Using Multiple PSD’s

Static case:
Combined loads

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008


Vibration: correlated loads
PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Vibration: uncorrelated loads
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-43 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-44
WORKSHOP

● Perform “Workshop 14: Dynamic Fatigue” from


MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide

● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you


don’t understand

PAT318, Section 22, September 2008 PAT318, Section 22, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-45 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S22-46
SECTION 23
MSC FATIGUE UTILITIES

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-2

UTILITIES OVERVIEW UTILITIES OVERVIEW (CONT.)


● MSC Fatigue has many utility modules, to help users
● Utility Modules’ Names
● 6 main categories of Utilities:
● Program names from nSoft have been prefixed with an
● Fatigue Preprocessing Utilities additional ‘m’ in MSC Fatigue
● Material Management Utilities ● Thus ‘QLD’ (Quick Look Display) becomes ‘mQLD’ etc.
● Advance Loading Utilities
● This prevents any conflict between different installations of MSC
● Graphical Display Utilities Fatigue and nSoft on the same machine.
● File Conversion Utilities
● The Quick Start Guide reflects this name change. However this
summary and the MSC Fatigue pull-down menus do not.
● A brief description of the most common Utilities is given
here. For further details, see the following documents:

● MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide


● User’s Guide Volume 2, MSC Fatigue

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-4
ACCESSING AND LOADING UTILITIES TIME HISTORY MANIPULATION TOOLS
● The Utilities can be accessed via the Patran GUI:
● Tools -> MSC.Fatigue pull down menu
● Arithmetic Manipulation (ART)
● Spreadsheet Multichannel Editor (COE)
● MSC Fatigue’s main loading module is the Time History ● Edit, Extract & Join Data (LEN)
Manager (ptime). It includes the following data processing ● Combine Multiple Channels (MFM)
functions : ● User defined formulae (FRM)
● ASCII File Input ● Multiple File Peak Valley Extraction (PVXMUL)
● Waveform creation
● Simultaneous Value Analysis on Multiple Channels
● Block Cycle Definition
(SIMMAX)
● Rainflow Cycle Counting
● Polynomial Data Transformation
● Graphical Data Editor (GED)
● Data Display Tools

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-6

ART – ARITHMETIC DATA MANIPULATION COE – MULTICHANNEL SPREADSHEET EDITOR

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-8
LEN - EDIT, EXTRACT & JOIN DATA MFM – MULTI FILE MANIPULATION

rear g2(g) A04.DAC


10

0
rear g2(g) A04.DAC
10
-5
5
-10
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0
s ecs

-5
rear g2(g) 3A04.DAC
10 -10
0 10 20 30 secs

5
rear g2(g) 3A04.DAC
10
0
5
-5
0
-10
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 -5
s ecs

-10
S creen 1 0 10 20 30 secs

Screen 1
PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-10

PVXMUL – MULTI FILE PEAK-VALLEY EXTRACTION PVXMUL – MULTI FILE PEAK-VALLEY EXTRACTION
Input .DAC files
(CONT.)
Gauge 1(uE) S61.DAC
1 0 00
Spike on all 3
S am ple = 409.6
N pt s = 1.354E 4
Max Y = 928.8
Min Y = -0.344
-2 0 0
0 10 20 30
seco n d s

Gauge 2(uE) S62.DAC


20
S am ple = 409.6
N pt s = 1.354E 4
Max Y = 15.83
Min Y = -119.8
-1 2 0
0 10 20 30
seco n d s

Gauge 3(uE) S63.DAC


800
S am ple = 409.6
N pt s = 1.354E 4
Max Y = 722.4
Min Y = -485.6
-6 0 0
0 10 20 30
seco n d s

Screen 1

Output .PVX files - reduced number of points


Shortens loading time histories by retaining only the maxima & minima 1 00 0
Gauge 1(uE) S61.PVX
Spike still in synch
S am ple = 1
N pts = 1.022E 4

(turning points). Gating can be used to ignore small cycles by absolute or


Max Y = 928.8
Min Y = -0.344
-2 0 0
2000 4 0 00 6 00 0 80 0 0 1E4
p o in t

percentage values. 20
Gauge 2(uE) S62.PVX
S am ple = 1
N pts = 1.022E 4
Max Y = 15.83
Min Y = -119.8
-1 2 0
2000 4 0 00 6 00 0 80 0 0 1E4
p o in t

Maintains ‘phase’ across channels by considering all channels 8 00


Gauge 3(uE) S63.PVX
S am ple = 1
N pts = 1.022E 4

simultaneously. If a turning point is found in any input channel, the -6 0 0


2000 4 0 00 6 00 0 80 0 0 1E4
Max Y = 722.4
Min Y = -485.6

corresponding point is written to all the output .pvx files.


p o in t

Screen 1

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-11 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-12
SIMMAX - SIMULTANEOUS VALUE GED – GRAPHICAL DATA EDITOR
ANALYSIS ON MULTIPLE CHANNELS
● Performs Simultaneous Value Analysis on multi-channel load
history data, from either a single RPC, or multiple DAC files.
● The ‘highest peaks’, ‘lowest valleys’, or ‘highest absolute 3
A04.DAC

maxima’ are first obtained by either scanning a single (‘control’) 2

rear g2 (g)
1

channel, or each of the input channels. 0

● Simultaneous values of all other channels at the positions (in


- 1

- 2

time) of the desired event(s) are saved into output files. 1 3 1 3 . 2 1 3 . 4 1 3 . 6

time (s ec s )

3 A 0 4 .D A C
3

(g)
1

g2
0

rear
-1

-2

13 1 3 .2 1 3 .4 1 3 .6

tim e (s e c s )

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-14

ADA – AMPLITUDE DISTRIBUTION ANALYSIS RSTATS – RUNNING STATISTICS


Calculates the probability of a certain amplitude in the time domain Calculates statistics for user-defined windows of data

S tra i n (u E ) SPIKES.DAC
1500

-1500
0 2 4 6 8 10
seconds

R un ning M a x (u E ) SPIKES.MAX
1500

-1500
2 4 6 8 10
s

R un ning M i n (u E ) SPIKES.MIN
1500

-1500
2 4 6 8 10
s
DISPLAY OF SPIKES.ADA DISPLAY OF SPIKES.ADA DISPLAY OF SPIKES.ADA DISPLAY OF SPIKES.ADA
R un ning M e a n (u E ) SPIKES.MEA
1500

0.08 1.2 100 2000


-1500
2 4 6 8 10
s
a t le v e l ( s e c o n d s )

R un ning Abs M a x (u E ) SPIKES.ABS


1500
D e n

-1500
P o in t C o u n t

2 4 6 8 10
s
(
P r o b .

R un ning R M S (u E ) SPIKES.RMS
C o u n ts

896.1

114.7
.

2 4 6 8 10
C u m

R un ning S D (u E ) SPIKES.RSD
e

861.9
T im

38.68
2 4 6 8 10
s

R un ning A re a (u E ) SPIKES.ARE
0 0 0 0.2 59.91

Strain (uE) Strain (uE) Strain (uE) Rise (uE)


-1442.3682 1496.079 -1442.3682 1496.079 -1442.3682 1496.079 2.9443359 2941.3915
-52.8
2 4 6 8 10
s

Screen 1
PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-16
FFF & BFL – DATA FILTERING ASD - AUTO SPECTRAL ANALYSIS
Calculates frequency content of data using FFT
Frequency Domain Time Domain

● Fast Fourier Filter (FFF) ● Butterworth Filter (BFL) ● Power Spectral Density
● Low Pass ● Low Pass ● Area under PSD =
● High Pass ● High Pass Mean square amplitude
● Band Pass ● Band Pass ● Amplitude Spectral Density
● Band Reject ● Band Reject ● Area under ASD =
● Simulates hardware filter amplitude
● Uses FFT and Inverse- ● Energy Spectral Density
FFT to remove ● Forwards and Forwards-
● ESD = PSD x Time
frequency content Backwards Methods
● Real & Imaginary
● Up to 8th order cut off ● Magnitude & Phase of FFT

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-18

FRA – FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS REGEN – PEAK-VALLEY REGENERATION


transfer function analysis of single input - single output linear system generates a time history from a cycle matrix
RMS Power(g^2. Hz^-1) G01.SXX
2.924E-3 Sample = 10
A Pillar(uE)
Npts = 1024
Max Y = 2.924E-3
Original peak valley 434
STRAIN.PVX
Sa mple = 1
Min Y = 0
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
history for comparison N pts = 3 98 5

● PSDs of input &


Hz.
M a x Y = 43 4
RMS Power(g^2. Hz^-1) G01.SYY
1.611E-3 Sample = 10 M in Y = -7 15 .9
Npts = 1024 -715.9

output 0 20 40 60 80 100
Max Y = 1.611E-3
Min Y = 6.655E-7
0 1000 2000 3000
Point

Hz.
Magnitude(uE) STRRM.DAC
● Cross-Power
RMS Power(g^2. Hz^-1) G01.SXY 418.2
1.352E-3 Sample = 10 Sa mple = 1
Npts = 1024
Max Y = 1.352E-3
N pts = 3 98 4
M a x Y = 41 8 .2
Spectra between 0
0 20

Gain(No units)
40 60 80 100
Hz.

G01.GAI
Min Y = 0

-706.9
M in Y = -7 06 .9
0 1000 2000 3000
input & output
2.632 Sample = 10
Npts = 1024 Seconds
Max Y = 2.632
0.1248 Min Y = 0.1248 Magnitude(uE) STRMM.DAC
0 20 40 60 80 100 425.4
Sa mple = 1
● Gain, phase & 180
Phase(Degrees)
Hz.

G01.PHA
Sample = 10
N pts = 3 98 4
Npts = 1024 M a x Y = 42 5 .4
coherence -179.9
0 20 40 60 80 100
Max Y = 180
Min Y = -179.9 -707.7
0 1000 2000 3000
M in Y = -7 07 .7
Hz.

relationships 0.9959
Coherence(No units) G01.COH
Sample = 10
Npts = 1024 Magnitude(uE)
Seconds

STRMKV.DAC
Max Y = 0.9959
392.9
Sa mple = 1
0 Min Y = 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 N pts = 3 98 5
Hz.
M a x Y = 39 2 .9
Screen 1 M in Y = -7 14
-714
0 1000 2000 3000
Seconds

Strain(uE) STRIRF.DAC
434
Sa mple = 1
N pts = 3 98 5
M a x Y = 43 4
M in Y = -7 06 .9
-706.9
0 1000 2000 3000
Seconds
PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-20
FATIGUE ANAYSIS TOOLS
OTHER FATIGUE RELATED TOOLS
● Stress-Life Analysis (SLF) ● Cycles Damage Analysis (CDA)

● Strain-Life Crack Initiation (CLF) ● Time Correlated Damage (TCD)

● Multiaxial Strain-Life (MLF) ● Stress Concentration Library (KTAN)

● Frequency Domain Fatigue (FLF) ● Cycles / Matrix Listing (CYL)

● Crack Growth LEFM (FCG) ● Rosette Analysis (SSA)

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-22

CDA – CYCLES & DAMAGE ANALYSIS TCD – TIME CORRELATED DAMAGE


compares 2D plots of 3D histogram data identifies the damaging portions of data

Total plot of file STRAIN STRAIN-LIFE FATIGUE ANALYSIS RESULTS SUMMARY


Time Correlated Fatigue damage Analysis
1273

224.2 10.67
Load History

StrainUE
-126.3 OS_LSW.DAC

-1526

Time
Damage %
Cycles

Correlated
Damage

Damage

Cumulative
Cum. Damage

Fatigue
0 0 Damage
0 4174
Range

Cycle Damage 0 20 40 60 80 100


TIME SECS.

Compares number of cycles with the damage contribution of that stress or strain range
PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-24
KTAN – STRESS CONCENTRATION LIBRARY SSA – ROSETTE ANALYSIS
calculates Kt for standard geometries calculates the stress/strain state from rosette data

Stress-Strain Analysis & Multiaxial Assessment


stress
● Mohr’s Circle Mohrs Circle for Strain

Gauge : Rectangular
530.7
SPRING SEAT(UE) PRS.MAX
Sample = 74
Npts = 8294
A E1 = 1000 uE
Max Y = 530.7

● Calculates strain
o E2 = 500 uE

d B o d/4 E3 = 500 uE -78.67 Min Y = -78.67


o 0 20 40 60 80 100
o
d
S E C S .
A Principals :

Max = 1104 uE SPRING SEAT(UE) PRS.MIN

r
s
components from Min =

Shear =
396

707
uE

uE
-135.9 Sample = 74
Npts = 8294
Max Y = -135.9
h r Min Y = -687.6

rosette
Angle = -23 degs. -687.6
0 20 40 60 80 100
d/8 from Grid 1

r SPRING SEAT(UE)
S E C S .

PRS.ABS
343.4 Sample = 74
Npts = 8294
M M
t
● Biaxiality ratio vs S13101.ABS
Strain
UE
-687.6
Max Y = 343.4
Min Y = -687.6
t M M
0 20 40 60 80 100

Principal plots
S E C S .
Time range : 0 secs to 23.06 secs
5 0 0 0
SPRING SEAT(UE) PRS.SHR
Kt = 0.22 + 1 668.6 Sample = 74
------------------- Kt is at point B (15 deg from vertical) 3 4 0 0 0
Npts = 8294
0.2
(r/t) . (h/t)
0.4 Nominal stress = M / ( 3.142 d / 32 ) Dominant Biaxiality Ratio -->
Max Y = 668.6
N.B. Kt at point A is constant = 1.6 3 0 0 0

In this case r / d = 0.1


● Angle vs Principal 2 0 0 0
-1151
0 20 40 60 80 100
S E C S .
Min Y = -1151

1 0 0 0
Angle(Deg rees) PRS.ANG

plots 0

-1 0 0 0
-1 -0 .5 0 0 .5 1
89.78 Sample = 74
Npts = 8294
Max Y = 89.78
Biaxiality Ratio (No units) -89.98 Min Y = -89.98

● Elastic- plastic
0 20 40 60 80 100

Choose from graphical library of geometries and stress concentrations


S E C S .
S13101.ABS
Strain
UE Biaxiality Ratio (No un its) PRS.BAX
0.4018 Sample = 74

conversion Time range : 0 secs to 23.06 secs


Npts = 8294
5 0 0 0 Max Y = 0.4018
4 0 0 0
-0.9427 Min Y = -0.9427
0 20 40 60 80 100
S E C S .
<-- Dominat Angle to the Zero Gauge
3 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

-1 0 0 0
-1 0 0 -5 0 0 5 0 1 0 0
Angle (Degrees)

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-26

DATA CONVERSION & OTHER UTILITIES WORKSHOP

● Data Conversion
● Binary to ASCII (DTA) ● Perform “Workshop 18: Fatigue Utilities” from
● MTS RPCTM File translators (DACREM/REMDAC) MSC Fatigue Quick Start Guide
● Cycles Matrix to Time History (REGEN)

● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you


● Other Functions don’t understand
● Convert data across platforms (CONFIL)
● View / Edit Data Header (FILMNP)
● Plotting setup on UNIX (PLTSYS)
● Viewing Plots on UNIX (QPLOT)
● Windows Plot Manager (WNPLOT)

PAT318, Section 23, September 2008 PAT318, Section 23, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S23-28
SECTION 24
MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-1 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-2

MULTIPLE S-N MEAN STRESS CURVES

● MSC Fatigue allows fatigue analysis with multi-mean


stress curves. These curves (S-N curves for different R-
Ratios) which account for mean stress effects in S-N
MULTIPLE S-N MEAN STRESS CURVES method by Goodman, Gerber or other empirical
methods.

● An ASCII Materials database (.mnd) is used, instead


of the standard Materials database (.mdb)

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-3 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-4
MEAN STRESSES MEAN STRESS USING MULTIPLE S-N CURVES
σmax ● Damage is calculated from appropriate S-N Curve, or
by interpolating between curves

stress mean stress

σmin
stress range R-ratio = -0.5

R ratio Loading condition


σ max + σ min R>1 σmax and σmin are negative,
σm = mean stress negative mean stress
2 R=1 Static loading R-ratio = +0.5
0<R<1 σmax and σmin are positive,
positive mean stress
R=0 Zero to tension loading, σmin = 0
σ min R=-1 Fully reversed, zero mean stress
R= mean stress ratio R<0 abs(σmax) < abs(σmin),
σ max σmax approaching zero
R infinite σmax = 0
PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-5 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-6

MULTIPLE S-N MEAN STRESS CURVES MULTIPLE S-N MEAN STRESS CURVES (CONT.)

● If S-N data at different mean stresses does not


exist, corrections to the stress range can be
applied to allow the use of a S-N curve
determined at R=-1. Methods include
● Goodman
● Gerber

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-7 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-8
WHEELS MODULE
● The Wheels Module (FEROT) is a specialised module
that analyses the fatigue life of rotating structures us S-N
method
● The FEROT module performs a critical plane S-N
WHEELS MODULE analysis using surface resolved stresses at every
(FATIGUE OF ROTATING STRUCTURES) surface node
● Includes Goodman and Gerber mean stress corrections
● User runs multiple static analysis with the loads rotated
around at given increments, eg, 36 cases with load
rotated 10 degrees per increment

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-9 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-10

WHEELS MODULE (CONT.) SETUP WHEEL FATIGUE ANALYSIS

36 static load
cases analysed

Multiple solutions
Stress at performed to obtain
Node n stresses for each node at
various positions relative
to the load.

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 1 2 ...


Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-11
... 35 36 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-12
SELECT ROTATING LOAD CASES RESULTS FROM ROTATING FATIGUE ANALYSIS

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-13 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-14

TEMPERATURE CORRECTED FATIGUE


● Fatigue Properties vary with temperature, especially for
components operating at high temperatures
● MSC Fatigue enables a temperature map to determine
material fatigue properties.
TEMPERATURE CORRECTED FATIGUE ● A set of fatigue curves is used to define fatigue material
characteristics at different temperatures.
● Stress-Life and Strain-Life is supported.
● Temperatures are steady state (i.e. no time varying or
creep effects)
● Temperatures may vary spatially, across the FE model.
● Temperatures are read from standard FE results files or
ASCII table.
PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-15 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-16
TEMPERATURE CORRECTED FATIGUE (CONT.)

AEROSPACE SPECTRUM FILE SUPPORT

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-17 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-18

AEROSPACE SPECTRUM FILE SUPPORT AEROSPACE SPECTRUM FILE SUPPORT (CONT.)


● Invoked by selecting ‘Load Spectrum’ from the ‘Job
● Stress Spectra are generated from information in ASCII Setup’ Menu (in the Loading Information Form)
editable:
● Spectrum (extension .spe); and
● Load Control (extension .lcs) files.

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-19 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-20
DUTY CYCLE ANALYZER

● Duty Cycle enables a schedule of multiple events to be


considered
● Each event can have its own number of repetitions, and
damage is linearly summed
DUTY CYCLE ANALYZER
● Load time histories can be in DAC, or RPC, format or
combination
● Enables insight into contribution from individual events
● Manages all the fatigue analysis runs and combine
results

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-21 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-22

DUTY CYCLE ANALYZER (CONT.) DUTY CYCLE JOB SETUP

● Select Duty Cycle from:

Job Setup (in Loading Information Form)

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-23 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-24
MSC FATIGUE FILES

jobname.fin
Job Control File (ASCII) written by Patran, when you press the
"APPLY" button in the Job Control Form, with the Action" set to:
"Full Analysis", "Partial Analysis", "Translate Only", “Save Job Only".
It defines the analysis setup as you fill out the various forms.
MSC FATIGUE FILES
jobname.fes
Input File (Binary) File for the Fatigue Solver modules. It contains
information necessary to run a complete fatigue job. It is created by
the Translator (PAT3FAT), which reads the file, jobname.fin, and the
FEA results information (e.g. stresses) from the model database file
(model.db). The"Full Analysis", or "Translate Only” Action on the
Job Control Form will create this file.

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-25 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-26

MSC FATIGUE FILES (CONT.) MSC FATIGUE FILES (CONT.)


jobname.fpp jobname.msg
This File (Binary) contains the result of the Rainflow Cycle Count Message File (ASCII) containing all messages during an analysis. If
(Preprocessing). The Action, "Partial Analysis", on the Job Control" the job does not run, this is the file to look at, for clues.
Form will create all files upto this point, and stop.
jobname.sta
jobname.fef Status File (ASCII), read by the Monitor action Job from the Job
Output File (ASCII) containing the Results of the Fatigue Analysis, Control Form. This is updated constantly, as the Analysis progresses.
when a Full Analysis is requested. It can be read into Patran to display
the results. It is also used by the MSC Fatigue Results module,
PFPOST, to do tabular listing of Fatigue results.

jobname.fef_tmpl
Template File (ASCII) used in reading the Fatigue Results into Patran.
This contains infromation defining the meaning of the various results
data in the jobname.fef file.

PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-27 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-28
MSC FATIGUE FILES (CONT.) WORKSHOPS
jobname.asc Fatigue Input file (ASCII)
jobname.crg Crack Growth Results file ● The following workshops are available if time is available and
jobname.cyh Cycle Distribution (histogram) at node/element n this topic is of interest to you
*.dac Load Time History file
jobname.dcl Design Criteria-Life XY file ● “WS8: Design Philosophies (S-N, E-N & LEFM)”
jobname.dyh Damage Distribution (histogram) at node/element n
jobname.fal Scale Factor-Life XY data file ● “WS9: Multiple Loads (S-N & LEFM)”
jobname.fef Fatigue Results (multi-node) file ● “WS12: Wheels Module – Analysis of Rotating Structures”
jobname.fes Fatigue Input file ● “WS15: Temperature Corrected Fatigue Analysis”
jobname.fin Job parameter file (ASCII) ● “WS16: Aerospace Spectrum File Support”
jobname.fos Factor of Safety Results file ● “WS17: Multiple Fatigue Analysis (Duty Cycle Analyzer)”
jobname.fpp Fatigue preprocessing Results file
● “WS19: Miscellaneous Features”
jobname.kfl Stress Concentration-Life XY file
*.ksn K Solution file
jobname.msg Fatigue Message file
jobname.sta Job Status file ● Be sure to ask for help if there’s anything you don’t understand
jobname.tcy Crack Growth Analysis Time History file
PAT318, Section 24, September 2008 PAT318, Section 24, September 2008
Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-29 Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation S24-30

You might also like